OMRON C200HE-CPU42

CPU Module

$ 595 .00

In Stock
Qty Available: 2
Used and in Excellent Condition

Open Web Page

https://www.artisantg.com/80876-3

Al
lt
rademar
ks,br
andnames
,andbr
andsappear
ingher
einar
ethepr
oper
tyoft
hei
rres
pec
ti
veowner
s.

•Cri
ti
calandexpedi
tedser
vic
es •Webuyyourexces
s,under
uti
li
zed,andi
dleequi
pment
•I
ns t
ock/Ready-t
o-shi
p •Ful
l
-ser
vic
e,i
ndependentr
epai
rc ent
er
Artisan Scientific Corporation dba Artisan Technology Group is not an affiliate, representative, or authorized distributor for any manufacturer listed herein.
Cat. No. W302-E1-12

Programmable Controllers
C200HX-CPUjj-E/-ZE
C200HG-CPUjj-E/-ZE
C200HE-CPUjj-E/-ZE

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 C200HX-CPUjj-E/-ZE
C200HG-CPUjj-E/-ZE
C200HE-CPUjj-E/-ZE
Programmable Controllers
Installation Guide
Revised September 2005

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
iv
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam-
age to the product.

! DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.

! WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.

! Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or mod-
erate injury, or property damage.

OMRON Product References

All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for any-
thing else.

Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.

1, 2, 3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.

 OMRON, 1996
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permis-
sion of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa-
tion contained in this publication.

v
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
vi
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
6 EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1-1 What is a Control System? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-2 The Role of the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1-3 How Does a PC Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

SECTION 2
System Configuration and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2-1 Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2-2 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2-3 Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2-4 Expanded System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3-1 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3-2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

SECTION 4
Programming Console Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4-1 Using the Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4-2 Checking Initial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

SECTION 5
Troubleshooting, Inspections, and Maintenance . . . . . . . 85
5-1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5-2 Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5-3 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5-4 Using Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Appendices
A Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
B Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
C Unit Current and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
D Dimensions and Mounting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
E Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

vii
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation of C200HX, C200HG, and C200HE Programmable Controllers,
and it includes the sections described below. Programming and operating information is provided in the
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE Operation Manual.

Please read this manual completely and be sure you understand the information provided before attempt-
ing to install a C200HX/C200HG/C200HE PC. Be sure to read the precautions in the following sec-
tion.

Section 1 is an introduction to Programmable Controllers (or PCs). General information is provided on

PCs and how they work.
Section 2 provides a description of all the components of the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. The names of
the parts of each Unit are given. Expanded systems, including networks and Special I/O Units are also
introduced.
Section 3 describes how to install and wire a PC System.
Section 4 provides general information about the Programming Console.
Section 5 provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PC operation. It also
covers maintenance and inspection, and explains how to replace consumable components such as
fuses, relays, and batteries.
Appendix A provides tables of standard models.
Appendix B provides tables of Unit specifications.
Appendix C provides the current/power consumptions for the Units and calculations of the total con-
sumption of a PC.
Appendix D provides Unit dimensions and mounting information.
A Glossary, and an Index are also provided.

! WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.

ix
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.

Warranty and Limitations of Liability

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
WARRANTY
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OMRON’s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
STRICT LIABILITY.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on
which liability is asserted.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON’S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.

xi
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Application Considerations
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
SUITABILITY FOR USE
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to
the combination of products in the customer’s application or use of the products.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
At the customer’s request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
system, or other application or use.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the
uses listed may be suitable for the products:

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
or uses not described in this manual.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
industry or government regulations.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a programmable product, or any

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
consequence thereof.

xii
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Disclaimers
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish
key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
tolerances are shown.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
PERFORMANCE DATA
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and
does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON’s test conditions, and the users

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Warranty and Limitations of Liability.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.

xiii
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
xiv
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller (PC) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the PC. You must read
this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PC system.

1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
6 EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

xv
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Safety Precautions 5

1 Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowl-
edge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.

2 General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement
machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating OMRON PCs.
Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this
manual close at hand for reference during operation.

! WARNING It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified
purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can
directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PC System to the abovementioned
applications.

3 Safety Precautions
! WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing so
may result in electric shock.

! WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.

! WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do so
may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.

! WARNING Do not touch the Power Supply Unit while power is being supplied or
immediately after power has been turned OFF. Doing so may result in electric
shock.

! WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor
affecting the PC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.

xvi
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operating Environment Precautions 4

• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects any
error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed. As a coun-
termeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be provided to en-
sure safety in the system.
• The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the
output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for
such problems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in
the system.
• When the 24-VDC output (service power supply to the PC) is overloaded or
short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned
OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must
be provided to ensure safety in the system.

! Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused
by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be readable.

! Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to another
node or changing contents of the I/O memory area. Doing either of these without
confirming safety may result in injury.

! Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the
torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in burning
or malfunction.

! Caution When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit with an 8-slot or 10-slot
CPU Backplane or Expansion I/O Backplane, be sure to use only Backplanes
with “-V1” at the end of the model number. Using an 8-slot or 10-slot Backplane
without “-V1” at the end of the model number may result in malfunction due to
deterioration of the base or pattern burnout. The 3-slot and 5-slot Backplanes do
not come in “-V1” models, and models without “-V1” can be used.

4 Operating Environment Precautions

! Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations:

• Locations subject to direct sunlight.

• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in
the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tempera-
ture.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.

! Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the
following locations:

• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.

xvii
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Application Precautions 5

• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.

• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.

! Caution The operating environment of the PC system can have a large effect on the lon-
gevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can lead to
malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PC system. Be
sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installa-
tion and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system.

5 Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PC system.

! WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.

• Always ground the system to 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Not con-
necting to a ground of 100 Ω or less may result in electric shock.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the fol-
lowing. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric
shock.
• Mounting or dismounting I/O Units, CPU Units, Memory Cassettes, Power
Supply Units, or any other Units.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting cables or wiring the system.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.

! Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the
PC or the system, or could damage the PC or PC Units. Always heed these pre-
cautions.

• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the

event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in this manual. An incorrect
voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated
voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places where the
power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuit-
ing in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may
result in burning.
• Install Units as far as possible away from devices that generate strong, high-
frequency noise.
• Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage.
Excess voltages may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of the
maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in burning.
• Change the applied voltage gradually using the adjuster on the Tester. If di-
electric strength is suddenly applied or turned OFF using the switch on the Tes-
ter, the generated impulse voltage may damage the Power Supply Unit.

xviii
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Application Precautions 5

• Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand voltage

tests. Not disconnecting the functional ground terminal may result in burning.
• Be sure that all the mounting screws, terminal screws, and cable connector
screws are tightened to the torque specified in this manual. Incorrect tighten-
ing torque may result in malfunction.
• Do not apply a force greater than 100 N on the terminal block when tightening
the terminals.
• Do not drop the product or subject it to excessive vibration or shock.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may re-
sult in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipa-
tion. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power sup-
ply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Wire correctly. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors completely.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks, Memory Units, expansion cables, and other
items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking
may result in malfunction.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the
Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of
the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PC.
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of
the DM Area, HR Area, and other data required for resuming operation. Not
doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit. Doing
either of these may break the cables.
• Do not place objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines. Doing so may
break the cables.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to
terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning.
• When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is correct.
Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order
to discharge any static built-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or dam-
age.
• When wiring crossovers between terminals, the total current for both terminals
will flow in the line. Check the current capacities of all wires before wiring cross-
overs.
• The following precautions apply to Power Supply Units with Replacement Noti-
fication.
• When the LED display on the front of the Power Supply Unit starts to alter-
nately display “0.0” and “A02” or the alarm output automatically turns OFF,
replace the Power Supply Unit within 6 months.
• Separate the alarm output cables from power lines and high-voltage lines.
• Do not apply a voltage or connect a load to the alarm output that exceeds
the rated voltage or load.

xix
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
EC Directives 6

• Maintain an ambient storage temperature of –20 to 30_C and humidity of

25% to 70% when storing the product for longer than 3 months to keep the
replacement notification function in optimum working
condition.
• Always use the standard installation method. A nonstandard installation
will decrease heat dissipation, delay the replacement notification signal,
and may degrade or damage the internal elements.
• Design the system so that the power supply capacity of the Power Supply Unit
is not exceeded.
• Do not touch the terminals on the Power Supply Unit immediately after turning
OFF the power supply. Electric shock may occur due to the residual voltage.

6 EC Directives
6-1 Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive

6-2 Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC
standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the stan-
dards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by the
customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc-
tives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the
equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed. The cus-
tomer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices and the
overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN61131-2
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference): EN61000-6-4
(Radiated emission: 10-m regulations)
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 VAC and 75 to
1,500 VDC meet the required safety standards for the PC (EN61131-2).

6-3 Conformance to EC Directives

The C200HX/C200HG/C200HE PCs comply with EC Directives. To ensure that
the machine or device in which the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE PC is used com-
plies with EC directives, the PC must be installed as follows:
1, 2, 3... 1. The C200HX/C200HG/C200HE PC must be installed within a control panel.
2. Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power
supplies used for the communications and I/O power supplies.
3. C200HX/C200HG/C200HE PCs complying with EC Directives also con-
form to the Common Emission Standard (EN61000-6-4). Radiated emis-
sion characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configu-
ration of the control panel used, other devices connected to the control pan-
el, wiring, and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall
machine or equipment complies with EC Directives.

xx
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
EC Directives 6

6-4 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods

The C200HX/C200HG/C200HE PCs conform to the Common Emission Stan-
dards (EN61000-6-4) of the EMC Directives. However, the noise generated
when the PC is switched ON or OFF using the relay output may not satisfy these
standards. In such a case, a noise filter must be connected to the load side or
other appropriate countermeasures must be provided external to the PC.
Countermeasures taken to satisfy the standards vary depending on the devices
on the load side, wiring, configuration of machines, etc. Examples of counter-
measures for reducing the generated noise are given on page 139.

Countermeasures
(Refer to EN61000-6-4 for more details.)
Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the
whole system with the PC included is less than 5 times per minute.
Countermeasures are required if the frequency of load switching for the whole
system with the PC included is 5 times or more per minute.

xxi
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 SECTION 1
Introduction
This section provides general information about Programmable Controllers (PCs) and how they fit into a Control System.

1-1 What is a Control System? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1-2 The Role of the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1-2-1 Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1-2-2 Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1-3 How Does a PC Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

1
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
What is a Control System? Section 1-1

1-1 What is a Control System?

A Control System is the electronic equipment needed to control a particular pro-
cess. It may include everything from a process control computer, if one is used,
to the factory computer, down through the PCs (and there may be many of them
networked together) and then on down through the network to the control com-
ponents: the switches, stepping motors, solenoids, and sensors which monitor
and control the mechanical operations.

Process Control Computer

Factory Computer

PCs

PC PC PC

Control Components
A Control System can involve very large applications where many different mod-
els of PC are networked together or it could be an application as small as a single
PC controlling a single output device.

2
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
What is a Control System? Section 1-1

A Position Control System

Position Control Unit Input Unit

Signal line for PC

Servomotor
driver control

Hand-held Programming
Power Console
source

Control panel
Control switch

DC Servomotor
Power Driver
source

DC Servomotor

DC Servomotor Driver

DC Servomotor

In the typical Control System example shown above, a PC controls the move-
ment of the workpiece bed across two horizontal axes using Limit Switches and
Servomotors to monitor and control movement.

3
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
The Role of the PC Section 1-2

1-2 The Role of the PC

The Programmable Controller, or PC, is the part of the Control System that
directly controls the manufacturing process. According to the program stored in
its memory, the PC accepts data from the input devices connected to it, and uses
this data to monitor the controlled system. When the program calls for some
action to take place, the PC sends data to the output devices connected to it, to
cause that action to take place. The PC may be used to control a simple, repeti-
tive task, or it may be connected to other PCs, or to a host computer in order to
integrate the control of a complex process.

1-2-1 Input Devices

PCs can receive input from either automated or manual devices. The PC could
receive data from the user via a pushbutton switch, keyboard, or similar device.
Automated input could come from a variety of devices: microswitches, timers,
encoders, photosensors, and so on. Some devices, like the Limit Switch shown
below, turn ON or OFF when the equipment actually makes contact with it. Other
devices, like the Photoelectric Switch and Proximity Switch shown below, use
other means, such as light or inductance, in order to get information about the
equipment being monitored.

Photoelectric switch Limit switch

Proximity switch

1-2-2 Output Devices

A PC can output to a myriad of devices for use in automated control. Almost any-
thing that you can think of could be controlled (perhaps indirectly) by a PC. Some
of the most common devices are motors, Solenoids, Servomotors, Stepping
Motors, valves, switches, indicator lights, buzzers, and alarms. Some of these
output devices; such as the motors, Solenoids, Servomotors, Stepping Motors,

4
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
How Does a PC Work? Section 1-3

and valves; affect the controlled system directly. Others; such as the indicator
lights, buzzers, and alarms; provide output to notify personnel.

Solenoid
Servomotor

Stepping motor

1-3 How Does a PC Work?

PCs operate by monitoring input signals and providing output signals. When
changes are detected in the signals, the PC reacts, through the user-pro-
grammed internal logic, to produce output signals. The PC continually scans the
program in its memory to achieve this control.
Block Diagram of PC

Power Supply

Memory

Signals Signals to
from Solenoids,
switches, Input Output motors,
CPU
sensors, etc.
etc.

Programming
Device

A program for your applications must be designed, and stored in the PC. This
program is then executed as part of the cycle of internal operations of the PC.

5
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
How Does a PC Work? Section 1-3

Cycle When a PC operates, that is, when it executes its program to control an external
system, a series of operations are performed inside the PC. These internal
operations can be broadly classified into the following four categories:
1, 2, 3... 1. Common (or overseeing) processes, such as watchdog timer operation and
testing the program memory.
2. Data input and output.
3. Instruction execution.
4. Peripheral device servicing.
Cycle Time The total time required for a PC to perform all these internal operations is called
the cycle time. The flowchart and diagram on the following page illustrate these
internal operations for a typical PC.
Timing is one of the most important factors in designing a Control System. For
accurate operations, it is necessary to have answers to such questions as these:
• How long does it take for the PC to execute all the instructions in its memory?
• How long does it take for the PC to produce a control output in response to a
given input signal?
The cycle time of the PC can be automatically calculated and monitored, but it is
necessary to have an understanding of the timing relationships within the PC for
effective system design and programming.

6
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
How Does a PC Work? Section 1-3

Flowchart of CPU Operation

Power application

Clears IR area and

resets all timers
Initialization on
power-up
Checks I/O Unit connections

Resets watchdog timer

Checks hardware and

Program Memory Overseeing
processes

NO
Check OK?

YES
Resets watchdog timer and
Sets error flags and turns program address counter
ON or flashes indicator
Program
execution
ALARM/ERROR Executes program
ALARM
(Flashing)
ERROR End of program?
(Solid ON) NO
YES
SCAN(18)
executed? NO
PC
YES Cycle time cycle
calculation time
Resets watchdog timer and waits
until the set cycle time has elapsed

Calculates cycle time

Resets watchdog timer

I/O refreshing

Refreshes input bits

and output signals

Services RS-232C RS-232C

connector connector
servicing

Services Host Link Units Host Link Unit

servicing

Peripheral
Services Peripheral devices device
servicing

Services Communications Communications

Boards Board servicing

SYSMAC LINK
Services SYSMAC LINK and and SYSMAC
SYSMAC NET Link Units NET servicing

7
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 SECTION 2
System Configuration and Units
This section describes the system configuration used for the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE PCs and the individual Units used in
the system configuration.

2-1 Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

2-1-1 CPU Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2-1-2 Expansion I/O Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2-1-3 I/O Connecting Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2-2 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2-2-1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2-2-2 Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2-2-3 Communications Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2-2-4 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2-2-5 Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2-2-6 Standard I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2-2-7 Group-2 High-density I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2-2-8 High-density I/O Units Classified as Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2-3 Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2-3-1 Programming Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2-3-2 CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2-4 Expanded System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2-4-1 Required Mounting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2-4-2 Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2-4-3 Link Systems and Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

9
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Basic Configuration Section 2-1

2-1 Basic Configuration

The basic configuration of the PC is shown below. With the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE, up to two or up to three Expansion I/O Racks (depending on
the CPU Unit) can be connected to the CPU Rack, depending on the number of
I/O points required in the system.

CPU Rack

I/O Connecting Cables

Expansion I/O Racks

2-1-1 CPU Rack

An example of a CPU Rack is shown below. The CPU Rack consists of a CPU
Backplane, CPU Unit, Power Supply Unit, I/O Units, and other special Units.

CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit

CPU Backplane

Other Units

10
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Basic Configuration Section 2-1

Power Supply Units The Power Supply Unit supplies power to the CPU Rack. The Power Supply
Units listed in the following table are available. Refer to 2-2-4 Power Supply
Units for further details.
Model Supply voltage Remarks
C200HW-PA204 100 to 120 VAC,, ---
C200HW-PA204S 200 to 240 VAC Provides 24-VDC output
terminals.
C200HW-PA204R/PA209R Equipped with RUN output
(See note.) contacts.
C200HW-PA204C 100 to 240 VAC (wide Equipped with
range) replacement notification
function.
C200HW-PD024 24 VDC ---
C200HW-PD025 24 VDC ---

Note The C200HW-PA204R/PA209R cannot be used with all combinations of CPU

Units and Backplanes. Refer to page 23, Restrictions for the C200HW-PA204R/
PA209R, for details.

CPU Units The CPU Units listed in the following tables are available. Refer to 2-2-1 CPU
Units for further details on the CPU Units.
Model User Data Extended Instruction Max. real I/O Max. No. of
program memory data memory processing points Expansion
memory (EM) time (basic supported I/O Racks
instructions)
C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE 3.2K words 4K words --- 0.3 µs min. 640 points 2 Racks
C200HE-CPU32-E/ZE 7.2K words 6K words --- 0.3 µs min. 880 points 2 Racks
C200HE-CPU42-E/ZE 7.2K words 6K words --- 0.3 µs min. 880 points 2 Racks
C200HG-CPU33-E/ZE 15.2K words 6K words 6K words 0.15 µs min. 880 points 2 Racks
C200HG-CPU43-E/ZE 15.2K words 6K words 6K words 0.15 µs min. 880 points 2 Racks
C200HG-CPU53-E/ZE 15.2K words 6K words 6K words 0.15 µs min. 1,184 points 3 Racks
C200HG-CPU63-E/ZE 15.2K words 6K words 6K words 0.15 µs min. 1,184 points 3 Racks
C200HX-CPU34-E/ZE 31.2K words 6K words 6K words x 3 0.1 µs min. 880 points 2 Racks
(18K words)
C200HX-CPU44-E/ZE 31.2K words 6K words 6K words x 3 0.1 µs min. 880 points 2 Racks
(18K words)
C200HX-CPU54-E/ZE 31.2K words 6K words 6K words x 3 0.1 µs min. 1,184 points 3 Racks
(18K words)
C200HX-CPU64-E/ZE 31.2K words 6K words 6K words x 3 0.1 µs min. 1,184 points 3 Racks
(18K words)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE 63.2K words 6K words 6K words x 8 0.1 µs min. 1,184 points 3 Racks
(48K words)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE 63.2K words 6K words 6K words x 16 0.1 µs min. 1,184 points 3 Racks
(96K words)

11
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Basic Configuration Section 2-1

Model Max. No. of Group-2 Max. No. of RS-232C Clock Communications

High-density I/O Units Special
Spec a I/O
/O ((RTC)
C) Board
oa d
64-point Units i
Units
(see note 1) (see note 2) (see note 3)
C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE Not supported Not supported 10 Units No No No
C200HE-CPU32-E/ZE 10 Units 5 Units 10 Units No Yes Yes
C200HE-CPU42-E/ZE 10 Units 5 Units 10 Units Yes Yes Yes
C200HG-CPU33-E/ZE 10 Units 5 Units 10 Units No Yes Yes
C200HG-CPU43-E/ZE 10 Units 5 Units 10 Units Yes Yes Yes
C200HG-CPU53-E/ZE 16 Units 8 Units 16 Units No Yes Yes
C200HG-CPU63-E/ZE 16 Units 8 Units 16 Units Yes Yes Yes
C200HX-CPU34-E/ZE 10 Units 5 Units 10 Units No Yes Yes
C200HX-CPU44-E/ZE 10 Units 5 Units 10 Units Yes Yes Yes
C200HX-CPU54-E/ZE 16 Units 8 Units 16 Units No Yes Yes
C200HX-CPU64-E/ZE 16 Units 8 Units 16 Units Yes Yes Yes
C200HX-CPU65-ZE 16 Units 8 Units 16 Units Yes Yes Yes
C200HX-CPU85-ZE 16 Units 8 Units 16 Units Yes Yes Yes

Note 1. Group-2 High-density I/O Units can be used on the CPU Rack or Expansion
I/O Rack under the C200Hj-CPUjj-(Z)E. They cannot be used on Slave
Racks.
2. Each 64 I/O Unit is treated as two Units.
3. Special I/O Units like the C200H-NC211 that are allocated the words for two
Units are treated as two Units.
4. Unit number settings for Group-2 Units for the following CPU Units must be
between 0 and 9:
C200HE-CPU32/42-E/ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43-E/ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44-E/ZE
5. Group-2 High-density I/O Units cannot be used with the C200HE-CPU11-E.

CPU Backplane The CPU Backplane is required to mount the CPU Unit and other Units compos-
ing the CPU Rack. The following CPU Backplanes are available depending on
the number of slot required for Units. Refer to 2-2-5 Backplanes for further
details.

Model Number of slots

C200HW-BC031 3
C200HW-BC051 5
C200HW-BC081-V1 8
C200HW-BC101-V1 10

Note When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit with an 8-slot or 10-slot
CPU Backplane or Expansion I/O Backplane, be sure to use the C200HW-
BC081-V1 or C200HW-BC101-V1.

Other Units The other Units that can be mounted to the CPU Rack include the Standard I/O
Units, High-density I/O Units, and Special I/O Units.

12
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Basic Configuration Section 2-1

2-1-2 Expansion I/O Racks

An example of an Expansion I/O Rack is shown in the following diagram. Expan-
sion I/O Racks consist of and I/O Backplane, Power Supply Unit, I/O Units, and
other Units. Expansion I/O Racks are connected to the CPU Rack to increase
the number of I/O Units and other Units that can be used by the PC. You can
connect up to 2 or up to 3 Expansion I/O Racks to a CPU Rack, the number
depending on the CPU Unit that is used.

Power Supply Unit

I/O Backplane

Other Units

Power Supply Unit The Power Supply Unit supplies power to the Expansion I/O Rack. The Power
Supply Units listed in the following table are available. Refer to 2-2-4 Power Sup-
ply Units for further details.
Model Supply voltage Remarks
C200HW-PA204 100 to 120 VAC,, ---
C200HW-PA204S 200 to 240 VAC Provides 24-VDC output
terminals.
C200HW-PD204R Equipped
q pp with RUN
C200HW-PD209R output contacts.
C200HW-PA204C 100 to 240 VAC (wide Equipped with
range) replacement notification
function.
C200HW-PD024 24 VDC ---
C200-HW-PD025 24 VDC ---

Note RUN output contacts cannot be used with Expansion I/O Racks.

I/O Backplane The I/O Backplane is required to mount the Power Supply Unit and other Units
composing the Expansion I/O Rack. The following I/O Backplanes are available
depending on the number of slot required for Units. Refer to 2-2-5 Backplanes
for further details.
Model Number of slots
C200HW-BI031 3
C200HW-BI051 5
C200HW-BI081-V1 8
C200HW-BI101-V1 10

Note When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit with an 8 or 10-slot Back-
plane, be sure to use the C200HW-BC081-V1 or C200HW-BC101-V1.

Other Units The other Units that can be mounted to an Expansion I/O Rack include the Stan-
dard I/O Units, High-density I/O Units, and Special I/O Units.

13
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

2-1-3 I/O Connecting Cable

The first Expansion I/O Rack is connected to the CPU Rack, and the second and
third Expansion I/O Racks are connected to the previous Expansion I/O Rack
through I/O Connecting Cable. There are five different lengths of cable avail-
able, which can be used as desired to provide the desired distance between
each Rack. The sum of the lengths of all the I/O Connecting Cables connected
within one PC, however, but be 12 m or less.

Model Cable length

C200H-CN311 30 cm
C200H-CN711 70 cm
C200H-CN221 2m
C200H-CN521 5m
C200H-CN131 10 m

2-2 Units

2-2-1 CPU Units

The following diagram shows the components of the CPU Unit as viewed from
the front cover. The numbers in the diagram correspond to the numbers of the
following items in the description.

1. Indicators

2. Memory Casette
compartment

3. DIP Switch

6. Communications Board 4. Peripheral port

compartment

5. RS-232C port

14
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

1, 2, 3... 1. Indicators
The indicators (LEDs) on the front cover of the CPU Unit operate as
described in the following table.
LED Contents
RUN (green) Lights when the PC is operating normally in MONITOR
or RUN mode.
ERR (red) Flashes if an error occurs that does not stop the CPU
Unit (a non-fatal error).
Lights if an error occurs that stops the CPU Unit (a fatal
error). If a fatal error occurs, the RUN indicator will turn
OFF and the outputs from all Output Units will turn OFF.
INH (orange) Lights when the Load OFF Bit (SR 25215) turns ON. If
the Load OFF Bit is turned ON, the outputs from all
Output Units will turn OFF.
COMM (orange) Lights when the CPU Unit is communicating via the
peripheral or RS-232C port.

2. Memory Casette Compartment

The Memory Cassette compartment contains the built-in RAM and can be
used to mount an optional Memory Cassette. Refer to 3-1-8 Mounting
Memory Cassettes for the mounting methods.

15
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

3. DIP Switch
The DIP switch is used to make various settings that determine who the PC
will operate. The C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Unit has a 6-pin DIP
switch, as shown in the following diagram. The settings of these pins are
listed in the following table.

Pin no. Setting Function

1 ON Writing disabled for user memory.
OFF Writing enabled for user memory.
2 ON Contents of the Memory Cassette automatically read when power is turned on.
OFF Contents of the Memory Cassette not automatically read when power is turned on.
3 ON Programming Console messages displayed in English.
OFF Programming Console messages displayed in the language stored in system ROM. (Messages
displayed in Japanese with the Japanese version of system ROM.)
4 ON Setting function for special instructions enabled.
OFF Setting function for special instructions disabled (default).
5 ON Standard communications parameters (see note) will be set for the following serial communications
ports.
• Built-in RS-232C port
• Peripheral port (only when a CQM1-CIF01/-CIF02 Cable is connected. Does not apply to Program-
ming Console.)
Note 1. Standard communications parameters are as follows:
Serial communications mode: Host Link or peripheral bus; start bits: 1; data length: 7 bits;
parity: even; stop bits: 2; baud rate: 9,600 bps
2. The CX-Programmer running on a personal computer can be connected to the peripheral
port via the peripheral bus using the above standard communications parameters.
OFF The communications parameters for the following serial communications ports will be set in PC
Setup as follows:
• Built-in RS-232C port: DM 6645 and DM 6646
• Peripheral port: DM 6650 and DM 6651
Note When the CX-Programmer is connected to the peripheral port with the peripheral bus, either set
bits 00 to 03 of DM 6650 to 0 Hex (for standard parameters), or set bits 12 to 15 of DM 6650 to 0
Hex and bits 00 to 03 of DM 6650 to 1 Hex (for Host Link or peripheral bus) separately.
6 ON Expansion TERMINAL mode for the Programming Console; AR 0712: ON
OFF Console mode for the Programming Console; AR 0712: OFF
Note All pins are set to OFF for the factory defaults.
4. Peripheral Port
The peripheral port is connected to peripheral devices, such as the Pro-
gramming Console.
5. RS-232C Port
The RS-232C port is connected to external devices that support an
RS-232C interface, such as personal computers.
6. Communications Board Compartment
The Communications Board compartment is used to mount a Communica-

16
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

tions Board. Refer to 3-1-9 Mounting a Communications Board for the

mounting methods.

2-2-2 Memory Cassettes

Memory Cassettes can be optionally mounted to increase memory capacity
over just the built-in RAM. There are two types of Memory Cassette available.
These are shown in the following diagram.

EEPROM Memory Cassette EPROM Memory Cassette

Notch

C200HW-ME

EEPROM Memory Cassette When an EEPROM Memory Cassette is installed in the CPU Unit, the user
memory (UM) and I/O data can be directly read and written. There is no need for
a backup power supply. The Memory Cassette can also be removed from the
CPU Unit and used for storing data.
Model Capacity
C200HW-ME04K 4K words
C200HW-ME08K 8K words
C200HW-ME16K 16K words
C200HW-ME32K 32K words
C200HW-ME64K 64K words

Note The C200HW-ME64K can be used with the C200HX-CPU65-ZE/CPU85-ZE

CPU Units only. It cannot be used with other CPU Units.

EPROM Memory Cassette With an EPROM Memory Cassette, the program is written using a PROM Writer.
The ROM is mounted to the Memory Casette and then installed in the CPU Unit.
I/O data cannot be stored.
Model Capacity
C200HS-MP16K 16K words/32K words

Memory Cassette Settings

EEPROM Memory Cassette Set the DIP switch. For an EEPROM Memory Cassette, set pin no. 1 (write pro-
tect) to either ON or OFF. Setting it to ON will protect the program in the memory
from being overwritten. Setting it to OFF will allow the program to be overwritten.
(The factory setting is OFF.)

EPROM Memory Cassette For an EPROM Memory Cassette, set pin no. 1 (ROM Type Selector) according
to the type of ROM that is mounted.
Pin no. 1 ROM type Model Capacity Access speed
OFF 27256 ROM-JD-B 16K words 150 ns
ON 27512 ROM-KD-B 32K words 150 ns

17
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

2-2-3 Communications Boards

An optional Communications Board can be mounted in the CPU Unit to provide
communications with the following types of devices/systems through the com-
munications port: SYSMAC LINK Systems, SYSMAC NET Systems, personal
computers, Programmable Terminals (PTs), bar code readers, temperature
controllers, devices with RS-232C or RS-422 interfaces, etc.
The following Communications Boards are available.

C200HW-COM01 C200HW-COM02-V1 C200HW-COM03-V1

Indicators Indicators

Bus
Connecting
Unit
connector

Port A Port A
(RS-232C) (RS-422/
RS-485)

C200HW-COM04-EV1 C200HW-COM05-EV1 C200HW-COM06-EV1

Indicators Indicators Indicators

Bus
Connecting Port B Port B
Unit (RS-232C) (RS-232C)
connector

Port A Port A Port A

(RS-232C) (RS-232C) (RS-422/
RS-485)

Model Specifications
C200HW-COM01 Connection port for SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC NET, or
other Communications Units.
C200HW-COM02-V1 RS-232C port x 1
C200HW-COM03-V1 RS-422/485 port x 1
C200HW-COM04-EV1 Connection port for SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC NET, or
other Communications Units.
RS-232C port x 1 (supports protocol macros)
C200HW-COM05-EV1 RS-232C port x 2 (supports protocol macros)
C200HW-COM06-EV1 RS-422/485 port x 1 (supports protocol macros)
RS-232C port x 1 (supports protocol macros)

18
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

Note Use either the C200HW-COM01 or a V1 Communications Board for the ZE-ver-
sion C200HX/HG/HE CPU Units.

Indicators (LEDs) The Communications Board indicators on the front panel of the CPU Unit indi-
cate the status of the Board, as described in the following table.

Indicator Color Status Meaning

RDY Green Not lit The Board cannot be used due to a hardware
error on the Board.
Flashing A setting error has been discovered in the PC
Setup or the protocol data.
Lit The Board is operating properly and
communications are possible.
COMB Orange Flashing Communications are in progress with the
device connected to port B.
COMA Orange Flashing Communications are in progress with the
device connected to port A.

2-2-4 Power Supply Units

Power Supply Units provide power to the CPU Rack and the Expansion I/O
Racks. Power Supply Units are available for either AC or DC power input. The
numbers in the diagram correspond to the numbers of the following items in the
description.

Part Names and Functions

• The following diagram shows the C200HW-PA204S.

1. POWER indicator

L2/N
100 to 120
VAC/ 200 to
240 VAC

L1

100 to 120

200 to 240

2. Terminals for exter-

nal connections

Note The AC input terminals

L2/N may be indicated as
L1/N and L2 instead of
+24 VDC 0.8 A
L2/N and L1 on some
L1 Units. However, there is
no difference in their
L1/N
functions or perfor-
mance.

L2

19
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

• The following diagram shows the C200HW-PA204C.

3. Replacement Notification Module

1. POWER indicator

2. Terminals for
external
connections

4. TEST switch

1, 2, 3... 1. POWER Indicator

The POWER indicator will be lit whenever the Power Supply Unit is output-
ting 5 V.
2. Terminals for External Connections
These terminals are connected as shown in the diagram below. The num-
bers in the diagram correspond to the numbers of the following items in the
description.
3. Replacement Notification Module (PA204C Only)
The seven-segment display on the Power Supply Unit indicates when
replacement is required.
4. TEST switch (PA204C Only)
The TEST switch can be used to temporarily turn OFF the alarm output
that notifies when replacement is needed.
Supply Output Output RUN Replacement Model
voltage capacity terminals output notification
(see note) function
100 to 120 VAC 5 VDC, Without Without Without C200HW-PA204
or 200 to 4.6 A, 30 W
240 VAC 24 VDC, Without Without C200HW-PA204S
(Select the 0.8 A
voltage using
the metal short Without With Without C200HW-PA204R
bar on the
voltage selector 5 VDC, Without With Without C200HW-PA209R
terminals.) 9 A, 45 W

100 to 240 VAC 5 VDC, Without Without Display: C200HW-PA204C

(wide range) 4.6 A, 30 W Supported
Output:
Supported
24 VDC 5 VDC, Without Without Without C200HW-PD024
4.6 A, 30 W
24 VDC 5 VDC, Without Without Without C200HW-PD025
5.3 A
26 VDC,
1.3 A,
40 W

Note The Power Supply Unit’s internal parts may deteriorate or be damaged if the Unit
is used outside the power supply output capacity range for a long period of time
or if the output is short-circuited.

20
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

Terminal Connections
C200HW-PA204: AC Input C200HW-PA204S: AC Input

L2/N L2/N
1. AC Input 100 to 120 VAC/ 100 to 120 VAC/
200 to 240 VAC
1. AC Input 200 to 240 VAC
Input Input
L1 L1

2. Voltage selector 100 to 120 2. Voltage selector 100 to 120

Close Close
terminals 200 to 240 terminals 200 to 240
Open Open

3. LG 3. LG

4. GR 4. GR

NC
24 VDC 0.8 A
NC 5. 24 VDC output
Output
NC

C200HW-PA204R: AC Input C200HW-PA209R: DC Input

L2/N L2/N
100 to 120 VAC/ 100 to 120 VAC/
1. AC Input 200 to 240 VAC 1. AC Input 200 to 240 VAC
Input Input
L1 L1

2. Voltage selector 100 to 120

2. Voltage selector 100 to 120
Close Close
terminals 200 to 240 terminals 200 to 240
Open Open

3. LG 3. LG

4. GR 4. GR

RUN OUTPUT RUN OUTPUT

250 VAC 7. RUN output 240 VAC
7. RUN output
24 VDC 24 VDC
2A 2 A Resistive

C200HW-PD024/
C200HW-PA204C C200HW-PD025: DC Input

1. AC Input 6. DC Input 24 VDC

3. LG
24 VDC
4. GR

3. LG
8. Alarm output
4. GR

1, 2, 3... 1. AC Input (C200HW-PA20jj Only)

Supply either 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC to the AC input terminals. If
one power supply phase of the equipment is grounded, connect the
grounded phase side to the L2/N (or L1/N if so indicated) terminal.
Supply 100 to 240 VAC to the C200HW-PA204C.
2. Voltage Selector Terminals (C200HW-PA20jj Only)
Short these terminals with a metal short bar when 100 to 120 VAC is being
supplied to the AC input terminals.
The C200HW-PA204C has a wide-range supply voltage, so voltage selec-
tor terminals are not provided.

21
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

3. LG
Ground the LG terminal to 100 Ω or less to increase resistance to noise and
protect against possible electrical shock.
4. GR
Ground the GR terminal to 100 Ω or less to protect against possible electri-
cal shock.
5. 24 VDC Output (C200HW-PA204S Only)
The 24 VDC output terminals can be used to supply power to DC Input Units.
The combined power consumption for both 5 V and 24 V must be 30 W or
less.
6. DC Input (C200HW-PD024/PD025 Only)
Supply 24 VDC to the DC input terminals.
7. RUN Output (C200HW-PA204R/PA209R Only)
The internal contact will turn ON when the CPU Unit is operating in RUN or
MONITOR mode. These terminals are available only on the C200HW-
PA204R.
8. Alarm Output (PA204C Only)
The alarm output is used to notify when Power Supply Unit replacement is
required. The output is normally ON. The output turns OFF when the time
until replacement is 6 months or less.

22
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

Restrictions for the Use the C200HW-PA204R/PA209R Power Supply Unit only with the following
C200HW-PA204R/PA209R CPU Units and Backplanes. CPU Units and Backplanes with manufacturing
numbers earlier than the ones given cannot be used.
CPU Units

Model Manufacturing number (See below.)

Made in Japan Made in the Netherlands
C200HX-CPU65-E 20Z6 or later 0147 or later
C200HX-CPU54-E 2817 or later
C200HX-CPU44-E 19Z6 or later
C200HX-CPU34-E 2417 or later
C200HG-CPU63-E 25Z6 or later
C200HG-CPU53-E 0817 or later
C200HG-CPU43-E 19Z6 or later
C200HG-CPU33-E 1017or later
C200HE-CPU42-E 20Z6 or later
C200HE-CPU32-E 19Z6 or later
C200HE-CPU11-E 20Z6 or later
C200HX/HG/HE- All models
CPUjj-ZE

Backplanes (with C200HW-PA204R)

Model Manufacturing number (See below.)

Made in Japan Made in the Netherlands
C200HW-BC031 0617 or later 0147 or later
C200HW-BC051 19Z6 or later
C200HW-BC081 24Z6 or later
C200HW-BC101 20Z6 or later

Backplanes (with C200HW-PA209R)

CPU Backplanes I/O Backplanes

C200HW-BC031 Same C200HW-BI031 Same
manufacturing manufacturing
C200HW-BC051 number as for C200HW-BI051 number as for
C200HW-PA204R. C200HW-PA204R.
C200HW-BC081-V1 (-V1 or later) C200HW-BI081-V1 (-V1 or later)
C200HW-BC101-V1 (-V1 or later) C200HW-BI101-V1 (-V1 or later)

! Caution When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit, be sure to use only the
Backplanes listed in the above table. Using a different Backplane may result in
malfunction due to deterioration of the base or pattern burnout.

Note Manufacturing numbers are as shown in the following diagram.

j j j j j

Factory code: A to Z or blank

Year (Ex. 1997 = 7)
Month (1 to 9 = Jan to Sep, X/Y/Z = Oct/Nov/Dec
Day (01 to 31)

23
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

2-2-5 Backplanes
There are two types of Backplane: the CPU Backplane, used for the CPU Rack,
and the I/O Backplane, used for Expansion I/O Racks. The Backplane serves to
hold and connect the following types of Unit: the CPU Unit, the Power Supply
Unit, I/O Units, Special I/O Units, etc.
The components of the Backplanes are shown in the following diagrams and
described following them. The numbers in the diagram correspond to the num-
bers of the following items in the description.
CPU Backplane
4. Unit mounting slots

1. Backplane
mounting
screw

2. Power Supply
3. CPU Unit Unit connector
6. Unit lock levers connector

7. I/O Connecting Cable connector

5. Unit connector

I/O Backplane
4. Unit mounting slots

1. Backplane
mounting
screw

2. Power Supply
Unit connector
6. Unit lock levers 5. Unit connector

7. I/O Connecting Cable connector

1, 2, 3... 1. Backplane Mounting Screws

Mount the Backplane firmly using four M4 screws.
2. Power Supply Unit Connector
Connect the Power Supply Unit.
3. CPU Unit Connector
Connect the CPU Unit.
4. Unit Mounting Slots
Mount one Unit to each slot. There are 3, 5, 8, or 10 slots available on the
Backplane depending on the model of Backplane used.
5. Unit Connectors
Connect I/O Units, Special I/O Units, Interrupt Input Units, and/or Analog
Timer Units.
Note Attach a C500-COV01 Connector Cover to any slot that is not being used to pre-
vent dust and dirt from entering the unused connectors.
6. Unit Lock Levers
The lock levers hold the Units in place. Press down on the level and pull up
on the Unit to release the lock.
7. I/O Connecting Cable Connector
Connect the I/O Cable from the CPU Rack to the first Expansion I/O Rack or
between adjacent Expansion I/O Racks to this connector.

24
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

2-2-6 Standard I/O Units

The following Standard I/O Units are available.

Input Units
Name Model number Specifications No. of
points
DC Input
p Unit C200H-ID211 12 to 24 VDC 8 pts
C200H-ID212 24 VDC 16 pts
AC Input Unit C200H-IA121 100 to 120 VAC 8 pts
C200H-IA122/IA122V 100 to 120 VAC 16 pts
C200H-IA221 200 to 240 VAC 8 pts
C200H-IA222/IA222V 200 to 240 VAC 16 pts
AC/DC Input Unit C200H-IM211 12 to 24 VAC/DC 8 pts
C200H-IM212 24 VAC/DC 16 pts

Note The C200H-ID001/002 cannot be used on the following Backplanes: C200HW-

BCjj1/BIjj1.

Output Units
Name Model number Specifications No. of
points
Contact Output Unit C200H-OC221 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) 8 pts
C200H-OC222 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) 12 pts
C200H-OC225 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VAC (For resistive loads) 16 pts
C200H-OC223 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) 5 pts
Independent commons
C200H-OC224 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) 8 pts
Independent commons
C200H-OC222N 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) 12 pts
C200H-OC226N 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) 16 pts
C200H-OC224N 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) 8 pts
Independent commons
Transistor Output
p C200H-OD411 1 A, 12 to 48 VDC 8 pts
U i
Unit C200H-OD211 0.3 A, 24 VDC 12 pts
C200H-OD212 0.3 A, 24 VDC 16 pts
C200H-OD213 2.1 A, 24 VDC 8 pts
C200H-OD214 0.8 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load short protection 8 pts
C200H-OD216 5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP) 8 pts
C200H-OD217 5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP) 12 pts
C200H-OD21A 1.0 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load short protection 16 pts
Triac Output Unit C200H-OA221 1 A, 250 VAC 8 pts
C200H-OA222V 0.3 A, 250 VAC 12 pts
C200H-OA223 1.2 A, 250 VAC 8 pts
C200H-OA224 0.5 A, 250 VAC 12 pts

Optional Products
The following optional products are available for use with Standard I/O Units.
• I/O Unit Cover: C200H-COV11
Cover for 10-pin terminal block.
• Space Unit: C200H-SP001
Used for vacant slots.

25
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

Components
The Standard I/O Units come in three shapes; A-shape, B-shape, and E-shape.
Refer to Appendix D Specifications for the dimensions of each Unit. The num-
bers in the diagram correspond to the numbers of the following items in the
description.
A-shape I/O Unit (10-terminal Terminal Block) B-shape I/O Unit (19-terminal Terminal Block)
1. I/O Unit lock notch

2. Nameplate

3. I/O indicators:
Indicate ON/OFF
status of points

4. 10-terminal terminal block

4. 19-terminal terminal block

E-shape I/O Unit (10-terminal Terminal Block)

I/O Unit lock notch

Nameplate

I/O indicators
Indicate ON/OFF
status of points

10-terminal terminal block

Note The C200H-OC226 is an extended B-shape I/O Unit and its dimensions are dif-
ferent from those of the B-shape I/O Unit shown above.

26
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

1, 2, 3... 1. I/O Unit Lock Notch

The lock notch fits into the Backplane to hold the Unit in place.

2. Nameplate
The nameplate shows the model number of the I/O Unit.

3. I/O Indicators (LEDs)

The indicators show the ON/OFF status of the I/O points. The arrangement
of the indicators varies with the model of I/O Unit, as shown in the following
tables.

4. Terminal Block
The terminal block is used to wiring I/O. There terminals blocks are remov-
able and consist of two parts.

Units with 10-terminal Appearance Unit type Model numbers

Terminal Blocks
8-point Units ID211, IM211, IA121,
IA221, OC221, and
OA216

8-point Units OD213, OD411, OA221,

F: Fuse burnt out and OA223
(with LED)

8-point Units OD214

ALARM indictors
(with LEDs)

5-point Units OD223

Units with 19-terminal Appearance Unit type Model numbers

Terminal Blocks
16-point Units ID212, IA122, IA122V,
IA222, IA222V, IM212,
OC225, OC226N, OD212,
and OD21A
12-point Units OC222, OC222N, OD211,
OD217, OA222V, and
OA224

8-point Units OC224 and OC224N

2-2-7 Group-2 High-density I/O Units

Group-2 High-density I/O Units come in two varieties; C-shape and D-shape.
The shape of the two varieties is the same, but C-shape Units have only one con-
nector, while the D-shape Units have two. C-shape Units have 32 I/O points and
D-shape Units have 64 I/O points.

Group-2 High-density I/O Units can be used with C200Hj-CPUjj-(Z)E CPU

Racks and Expansion I/O Racks. They cannot be used with Slave Racks.

27
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

Unit Specifications Shape Model

DC Input Unit 12 VDC; 64 pts D C200H-ID111
24 VDC; 32 pts C C200H-ID217
C200H-ID218
24 VDC; 64 pts D C200H-ID216
C200H-ID219
Transistor Output Unit 4.5 VDC,16 mA to C C200H-OD218
26.4 VDC,100 mA; 32 pts
4.5 VDC,16 mA to D C200H-OD219
26.4 VDC,100 mA; 64 pts
24 VDC, 0.5 A (5A/Unit); 32 pts C C200H-OD21B
• Group-2 High-density I/O Units can be used on the CPU Rack or Expansion
I/O Rack under the C200Hj-CPUjj-(Z)E. They cannot be used on Slave
Racks.
• Group-2 High-density I/O Units cannot be used with the C200HE-CPU11-E.
• The unit number settings for the following CPU Units are from 0 to 9: C200HE-
CPU32/42-(Z)E, C200HG-CPU33/43-(Z)E, and C200HX-CPU34/44-(Z)E.
C-shape Units (32-point Units)

1. I/O Unit lock notch

2. Nameplate

3. I/O indicators

4. I/O number setting switch

5. 40-pin connector

28
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

D-shape Units (64-point Units)

1. I/O Unit lock notch

2. Nameplate
3. I/O indicators LED

4. I/O number setting switch

6. Indicator switch

5. 40-pin connectors

1, 2, 3... 1. I/O Unit Lock Notch

The lock notch fits into the Backplane to hold the Unit in place.
2. Nameplate
The nameplate shows the model number of the I/O Unit.
3. I/O Indicators (LED)
The indicators show the ON/OFF status of the I/O points. The arrangement
of the indicators varies with the model of I/O Unit, as shown in the following
tables.
4. I/O Number Setting Switch
This switch is used to set the I/O number for the Unit. Set the number to
between 0 and F for Units with one 40-pin connector and to between 0 and 8
or A and E for Units with two 40-pin connectors.
5. 40-pin Connectors
The number of connectors depends on the Unit.
6. Indicator Switch
Determines whether the status of connector 1 or connector 2 I/O points are
shown on the I/O indicators.

I/O Indicators
Units with One 40-pin Appearance Unit type Model numbers
Connector
32 points Unit ID216 and ID218

32 points Unit OD218 and OD21B

F: Fuse burnt out
(with LED)

29
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Units Section 2-2

Units with Two 40-pin Appearance Unit type Model numbers

Connectors
64 points Unit ID111, ID217, and ID219

64 points Unit OD219

F: Fuse burnt out
(with LED)

2-2-8 High-density I/O Units Classified as Special I/O Units

Some High-density I/O Units are classified as Special I/O Units. Up to 10 or up to
16 Special I/O Units can be connected to a PC depending on the CPU Unit that is
used. These Units have two 24-pin connectors. In general, these Units control
32 I/O points, although some Units can control 128 I/O points when set for
dynamic operation.
Refer to Appendix B Specifications for detailed specifications and dimensions of
the Units.
Unit Model Number Specifications
TTL Input Unit C200H-ID501 5 VDC, 32 inputs
DC Input Unit C200H-ID215 24 VDC; 32 inputs
TTL Output Unit C200H-OD501 5 VDC, 32 outputs
Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD215 24 VDC; 32 outputs
TTL I/O Unit C200H-MD501 5 VDC, 16 inputs, 16 outputs
DC Input/Transistor
p Output
p Unit C200H-MD115 12 VDC; 16 inputs, 16 outputs
C200H-MD215 24 VDC; 16 inputs, 16 outputs

1. I/O Unit lock notch

2. Nameplate

3. I/O indicators LED

4. Unit number setting switch

5. 24-pin connectors

1, 2, 3... 1. I/O Unit Lock Notch

The lock notch fits into the Backplane to hold the Unit in place.
2. Nameplate
The nameplate shows the model number of the Unit.

30
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Peripheral Devices Section 2-3

3. I/O Indicators (LED)

The indicators show the ON/OFF status of the I/O points.
4. Unit Number Setting Switch
Turn OFF the power supply to the PC and set the unit number to between 0
and F using a flat-blade screwdriver, being careful not to damage the slot or
leave the switch set half-way between two settings.
5. 24-pin Connectors
There are two 24-pin connectors.

2-3 Peripheral Devices

There are various Peripheral Devices that can be use to support C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE operation. These Peripheral Devices are introduced in this
section.

2-3-1 Programming Consoles

There are two Programming Consoles that can be used with the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE: the C200H-PRO27-E and the CQM1-PRO01-E. The follow-
ing illustration shows the C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console.

Connected to Peripheral Port on CPU Unit.

C200H-CN222 (2 m) or
C200H-CN422 (4 m), Connecting
Cable

C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console

As shown in the illustration, the C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console con-

nects to the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Unit with C200H-CN222 or
C200H-CN422 Connecting Cable, which must be purchased separately.
The CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console comes with 2 m of Connecting
Cable.

31
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Peripheral Devices Section 2-3

2-3-2 CX-Programmer
The CX-Programmer is a Programming Device that runs on Windows. It is used
for full-scale programming operations. Use the following Connecting Cables to
connect the computer running the CX-Programmer with the C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z) PCs.
Connecting Cables for C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) PCs
Unit Unit port Computer Computer Network Model Length Remarks
port type
CPU Unit Built-in IBM PT/AT D-Sub, 9-pin Peripheral CQM1-CIF02 3.3 m ---
peripheral or male bus or
port compatible SYSWAY
Built-in IBM PT/AT D-Sub, 9-pin SYSWAY XW2Z-200S- 2 m/5 m ESD (elec-
RS-232C or male CV/500S-CV trostatic dis-
port compatible charge)
D-Sub, countermea-
9-pin,
p , female sures
XW2Z-200S-V/ 2 m/5 m ---
500S-V
Host Link RS-232C IBM PT/AT D-Sub, 9-pin SYSWAY XW2Z-200P-V/ 2 m/5 m ---
Unit (See port, or male 500P-V
note.) D-Sub, compatible
(C200H- 25-pin
LK201-V1 or female
C120-LK201-
V1)
Communica- RS-232C IBM PT/AT D-Sub, 9-pin SYSWAY XW2Z-200S- 2 m/5 m ESD (elec-
tions Board port, or male CV/500S-CV trostatic dis-
D-Sub, 9-pin compatible charge)
female countermea-
sures
XW2Z-200S-V/ 2 m/5 m ---
500S-V

Note The Host Link Units cannot be used to connect the CX-Programmer to a Z-type
PC (i.e., one with a -Z suffix on the model number).

32
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

2-4 Expanded System Configurations

2-4-1 Required Mounting Conditions

A maximum of 16 Special I/O Units including PC Link Units can be mounted to
any slot of CPU, Expansion I/O, and Slave Racks. I/O word numbers 100 to 199,
400 to 459, and DM 1000 to DM 2599 are allocated to each Special I/O Unit.
High-density I/O Units can be mounted Remote I/O Slave Units only when the
Remote I/O Slave Units are connected to C200H-RM001-PV1 or
C200H-RM201 Remote I/O Master Units.
The number of Special I/O Units used with a Slave Rack is limited by data trans-
mission considerations, as shown in the table below. The numbers in the table
indicate the maximum number of Units of groups A, B, C, or D which can be used
with a single Slave Rack.

A B C D
High-speed Counter Units High-density and Mixed I/O Temperature Sensor Units Position Control Units
Position Control Units Units Voice Units (C200H-NC211,
(C200H-NC111/112, Temperature Control Units C200HW-NC413)
C200HW-NC113/213) Cam Positioner Units Motion Control Units
ASCII Units Heat/Cool Temperature
Analog I/O Units Control Unit
ID Sensor Units PID Control Unit
Fuzzy Logic Units
4 units max. 8 units max. 6 units max. 2 units max.

Note 1. When a combination of Units from groups A, B, C, and D is used, the number
from each group must satisfy both the following equations:
3A + B + 2C + 6D ≤ 12
A+B+C+D≤8
2. Other Units can be added until the total number of Units reaches ten. If PC
Link Units are used, the number of Units including the PC Link Units must
not exceed ten.

2-4-2 Special I/O Units

It is possible to connect a variety of Special I/O Units to the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE Racks.

High-density I/O Units The TTL Input Unit, DC Input Unit, TTL Output Unit, Transistor Output Unit, TTL
(Special I/O Units) I/O Unit, and DC Input/Transistor Output Unit are High-density I/O Units.
The C200H-ID501, C200H-OD501, and C200H-MD501 are I/O Units for the
TTL Unit.
Eight input points each of the C200H-ID501, C200H-ID215, C200H-MD501,
C200H-MD115, and C200H-MD215 can be set for pulse input.
A High-density I/O Unit can retrieve pulse input, which is shorter in length than
that of the High-density I/O Unit cycle time, as an input signal when the High-
density I/O Unit is set for pulse input.

33
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

The C200H-MD501, C200H-MD115, and C200H-MD215 can each be set for

128 dynamic input points (64 points x two circuits) and the C200H-OD501 and
C200H-OD215 can each be set for 128 dynamic output points (64 points x two
circuits).

High-speed Counter Units The High-speed Counter Units have the following six operation modes.
Linear, circular, preset, gate, latch, and sampling operation modes
The High-speed Counter Units, which have a counting speed of 50 kcps, can be
used for phase-difference pulse input, adding and subtracting pulse input, and
pulse and direction input. The High-speed Counter Units have eight-point output
per single axis.

Rotary Encoder

Position Control Units The Position Control Units have pulse-train output, thus enabling connection to
stepping motor drivers or servomotor drivers.
The C200H-NC111 and C200H-NC112 are for a single axis, and the
C200H-NC211 is for two axes.

Stepping motor
driver or servo-
motor driver with
pulse-train input.

Stepping motor
or servomotor

5-V power supply

34
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

Analog I/O Units The Analog Input (A/D) Units retrieve analog inputs and the Analog Output (D/A)
Unit sends analog outputs.
The following Analog I/O Units are available:
C200H-AD001 with 4-point analog input, C200H-AD002 with 8-point analog
input, C200H-DA001 with 2-point analog output, and C200H-DA002 with
4-point analog output

The Analog Input (AD) Unit is used.

Analog input Preamplifier Sensor

transducer

Analog output Servomotor controller Motor

variable adjuster

The Analog Output (DA) Unit is used.

Temperature Sensor Units The following table lists Temperature Sensor Unit models and available temper-
ature sensors.
Only one kind of temperature sensor can be connected to the C200H-TS001 or
C200H-TS002. Each Temperature Sensor Unit connects to a maximum of four
temperature sensor inputs.
Model Connectable temperature sensor
C200H-TS001 K (CA)/K (IC)
C200H-TS002 K (CA)/L (Fe-CuNi) (available for DIN)
C200H-TS101 JPt 100 Ω
C200H-TS102 Pt 100 Ω (available for DIN/1989JIS)

Thermocouple: K (CA), J (IC), L (Fe-CuNi)

Platinum resistance thermometer: JPt100 Ω, Pt100 Ω

ASCII Unit BASIC programs can be input to the ASCII Unit via its port 1 from any personal
computer in terminal mode if the personal computer incorporates an RS-232C
interface.
It is possible to write BASIC programs with an IBM PC/AT or compatible.

Port 1
BASIC Program:
Personal computer
(RS-232C)
Input: Bar code reader
Port 1/2 Output: Printer and plasma display

35
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

Voice Unit Voice messages can be input from dynamic microphones or cassette tape
recorders and output from loudspeakers or headsets via the Voice Unit.
The Voice Unit incorporates a sentence function and word combination function,
either of which can be selected to record voice messages for 64 seconds maxi-
mum.
Voice can be saved on floppy disks with an IBM PC/AT or compatible.

Voice input
Microphone or cassette tape player

Voice output
Headset or speaker

Voice saving/Re-input Personal computer, or PROM Writer

C200H-CN224 Connect-
ing Cable (2 m long with
6- and 25-pin connectors)

ID Sensor Units The ID Sensor Units are used to construct non-contact information recognition
systems.
By connecting a R/W Head or R/W Antenna to an ID Sensor Unit, data can be
written to the Data Carrier attached to each moving object and the data of the
Data Carrier can be read by the C200HS.
The following models of ID Sensor Units are available.
Electromagnetic induction model: C200H-IDS01-V1
Microwave model: C200H-IDS21

C200H-PRO27-E
Programming Console

Data Carrier
R/W Head
R/W Antenna

36
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

Fuzzy Logic Unit The C200H-FZ001 Fuzzy Logic Unit incorporates a high-functional fuzzy Logic
processor and allows high-speed fuzzy logic.
A personal computer can be connected to the Fuzzy Logic Unit via RS-232C
cables for software development and monitoring. Use the C500-SU981-E Fuzzy
Support Software for IBM PC/AT or compatible personal computers.

Temperature Control Units Thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers connect to the Tempera-
ture Control Unit. With the built-in selector of the Temperature Control Unit, ten
kinds of thermocouples or two kinds of platinum resistance thermometers can
be selected.
Select the control output of the Temperature Control Unit from the following.
Model Temperature sensor input Control output
C200H-TC001 Thermocouple:
p Transistor output
C200H-TC002 R S,
R, S K (CA),
(CA) J (IC),
(IC) T (CC),
(CC) Voltage output
(CRC) B,
E (CRC), B N,
N L (IC),
(IC) U (CC)
C200H-TC003 Current output
C200H-TC101 Platinum resistance thermometer: Transistor output
C200H-TC102 JP 100 Pt100
JPt100, P 100 Voltage output
C200H-TC103 Current output

Temperature Control Unit Data Setting Console

37
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

Cam Positioner Unit A single C200H-CP114 Cam Positioner Unit is as powerful as 48 mechanical
cams because it can complete jobs that normally require 48 mechanical cams.
It is possible to set 16-point external output and 32-point internal output as cam
output. The 32-point internal output can be retrieved as data by the C200HS.
Cam Positioner Unit Data Setting Console

Heat/Cool Temperature The Heat/Cool Temperature Control Units measure the temperature of an object
Control Units with a connected temperature sensor (thermocouple or platinum resistance
thermometer), and heats and cools according to a preset control mode.
Select the control output of the Heat/Cool Temperature Control Unit from the fol-
lowing.
Model Temperature sensor input Control output
C200H-TV001 Thermocouple:
p Transistor output
C200H-TV002 R S,
R, S K (CA),
(CA) J (IC),
(IC) T (CC),
(CC) Voltage output
E (CRC),
(CRC) B,
B N,
N L (IC),
(IC) U (CC)
C200H-TV003 Current output
C200H-TV101 Platinum resistance thermometer: Transistor output
C200H-TV102 JP 100 Pt100
JPt100, P 100 Voltage output
C200H-TV103 Current output

Heat/Cool Temperature Control Unit Data Setting Console

38
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

PID Control Unit The PID Control Unit scales inputs from connected sensors and then carries out
PID control according to preset control mode.
Select the control output of the PID Control Unit from the following.
Model Control output
C200H-PID01 Transistor output
C200H-PID02 Voltage output
C200H-PID03 Current output

PID Control Unit Data Setting Console

39
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

2-4-3 Link Systems and Networks

The C200HX/C200HG/C200HE can be included in an expanded system config-
uration including a Host Link System (SYSMAC WAY), a PC Link System, Opti-
cal or Wired Remote I/O Systems (SYSMAC BUS), CompoBus/S, DeviceNet,
SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK System. All of these can be used in com-
mon with the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. In addition, the following Unit can be
connected: B7A Interface Unit. Specifications for all of these Units are provided
in Appendix B Specifications.

SYSMAC LINK Systems OMRON’s SYSMAC LINK System is a communications network that connects
up to 62 nodes to provide data links, data transfers, and datagram services.

CPU Unit

SYSMAC LINK Unit

C200HW-SLK13/SLK14
(optical)
C200HW-SLK23/SLK24
(coaxial cable)

SYSMAC-series PC

• Data links provide automatic transfer of up to 2,966 words of data in the LR

and/or DM Areas.

• Data transfers of up to 256 words each can be implemented by programming

the NETWORK READ (RECV(98)) and NETWORK WRITE (SEND(90))
instructions in the user program.

• Data transfers via datagrams are also available using a command/response

format.

• A C200HW-COM01 or C200HW-COM04-E Communications Board and a

C200HW-CE001 or C200HW-CE002 Bus Connection Unit are required to use
a SYSMAC LINK Unit.

The C200H-APS03 Auxiliary Power Supply Unit is used as a backup power sup-
ply for optical SYSMAC LINK Systems.

40
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

SYSMAC NET Link Systems OMRON’s SYSMAC NET Link System is an FA-oriented limited-area network
that connects up to 126 nodes to provide datagram services, data transfers, and
data links.

SYSMAC NET Link Unit

C200HS-SNT32

CPU Unit

Line server

Central power supply

FA computer SYSMAC-series PC

• Data transfers via datagrams are implemented using a command/response

format.
• Data transfers can also be implemented for up to 990 words each by program-
ming the NETWORK READ (RECV(98)) and NETWORK WRITE (SEND(90))
instructions in the user program.
• Data links provide automatic transfer of up to 32 words of data in the LR Area
and/or up to 99 words of data in other data areas.
• A C200HW-COM01 or C200HW-COM04-E Communications Board and a
C200HW-CE001 or C200HW-CE002 Bus Connection Unit are required to use
a SYSMAC NET Link Unit.
The C200H-APS01 and C200H-APS02 Power Supply Adapters are used to
connect to a central power supply (and must be mounted in the slot immediately
to the left of the SYSMAC NET Link Unit).
Note Refer to the SYSMAC NET Link System Manual (W178) for further information.

41
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

Host Link Systems A maximum of two Host Link Units can be mounted to slots in either the CPU
Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. The following Host Link Units are available:
C200H-LK101-PV1 (optical cable)
C200H-LK201-PV1 (RS-232C)
C200H-LK202-V1 (RS-422)
For details, refer to the SYSMAC C-series Rack PCs SYSMAC WAY - Host Link
Units System Manual (W143).
Host Link Unit FA computer

PC Link System A PC Link System can be used to transfer data between PCs by means of LR
0000 through LR 6315. A maximum of two C200H-LK401 PC Link Units can be
mounted to slots in either the CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. For details,
refer to the PC Link System Manual (W135).
PC Link Unit

C200HS

C200HX/C200HG/C200HE

Note The PC Link Units must be counted as Special I/O Units.

42
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

CompoBus/S Systems The CompoBus/S is a high-speed I/O data communications system designed to
meet the needs of time-critical FA applications.

I/O Terminal
CompoBus/S Master Unit

Sensor Terminal

Bit Chain Terminal

• The CompoBus/S Master Unit is mounted to the CPU Rack or an Expansion

I/O Rack. The number of Master Units that can be mounted is indicated below.
Number of Mountable Master Units
C200HX/HE, C200HG-CPU3j/4j/(-Z)
10 Units when used as 1 Special I/O Unit (i.e., 10 words allocated)
5 Units when used as 2 Special I/O Units (i.e., 20 words allocated)
C200HX, C200HG-CPU5j/6j/8j(-Z)
16 Units when used as 1 Special I/O Unit (i.e., 10 words allocated)
5 Units when used as 2 Special I/O Units (i.e., 20 words allocated)

Note Unit numbers A to F can be set only with the following CPU Units.
C200HX-CPU54(-Z)
C200HX-CPU64(-Z)
C200HX-CPU65-Z
C200HX-CPU85-Z
C200HG-CPU53(-Z)
C200HG-CPU63(-Z)

• For each Master Unit, up to 32 slaves can be connected for a maximum of 256
points of I/O data communications (8 input words and 8 output words).
• The Special I/O Area is used for data transmissions.
• A wide variety of slaves are available to support relay, sensor, and other I/O.
• Bit Chain Terminals can also be used as slaves to send and receive small
quantities of I/O points at greater distances.

Note The CompoBus/S Master Units must be counted as Special I/O Units.

43
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

DeviceNet Systems The DeviceNet is an I/O data communications system conforming to the Device-
Net standard being developed to standardize device-level networks for FA.

CQM1 (I/O Link Unit)

DeviceNet Master Unit

I/O Terminal
Adapter
Sensor Terminal

Analog Input Terminal

Analog Output Terminal

• The DeviceNet Master Unit is mounted to the CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O
Rack. Only one Master Units can be mounted.
• Up to 50 slaves can be connected for a maximum of 1,600 points of I/O data
communications (50 input words and 50 output words).
• The IR Area is used for data transmissions (outputs: IR 50 to IR 99; inputs: IR
350 to IR 399).
• A wide variety of slaves are available to support relay, sensor, analog and other
I/O.
Note 1. The DeviceNet System cannot be used at the same time as a Remote I/O
System.
2. The DeviceNet Master Units must be counted as Special I/O Units.
3. Slaves made by other manufacturers can be connected as long as they con-
form to the DeviceNet standard.

44
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

Remote I/O Systems A maximum of two Optical or Wired Remote I/O Master Units can be mounted to
slots in either the CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. A maximum total of five
Slave Racks, each with a single Slave Unit, can be connected. C500 Slave
Racks can be used, but each C500 Slave Rack must be counted as two Racks in
calculating the total. For details, refer to the SYSMAC C-series Rack PCs Wired
Remote I/O System Manual (W120) or SYSMAC C-series Optical Remote I/O
System Manual (W136).

Remote I/O Slave Unit Remote I/O Slave Unit

C500 Remote I/O Slave Unit C500 Remote I/O Slave Unit

Optical I/O Units I/O Interface Terminal

I/O terminal

Optical Systems
A maximum total of 64 Optical I/O Units can be connected in an optical system
(32 words).

Note 1. The number of Slave Racks is not related to the number of Master Units.
2. If the number of Optical I/O Units exceeds 32, a B500-RPT01(-P) Repeater
Unit is required.
3. Optical and Wired Units cannot be mixed in the same system.
Wired Systems
A maximum total of 32 I/O Interface Terminals and I/O Terminals (32 words) can
be connected in a wired system.

45
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

Controller Link Systems Controller Link Units can be mounted to C200HX/HG/HE CPU Racks to create
automatic data links that can be freely set between C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1,
and/or CV-series PCs. Controller Link Support Boards are also available so that
IBM PC/AT or compatibles can also be included in the Controller Link System.
Controller Link Systems support a message service that can be used as
required for communications using the SEND and RECV instructions. An exam-
ple configuration for C200HX/HG/HE PCs is shown below.
Controller Link Unit
(C200HW-CLK21)

C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit

Communications Board
(C200HW-COM01/COM04-EV1)
Bus Connection Unit
(C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012)

• Controller Link Systems are wired using multidrop connections with twisted-
pair cable. Each System can include up to 32 nodes and can extend up to 1 km
for 500-Kbps communications and up to 500 m for 2-Mbps communications.
• For data links, each PC node can read/write up to 8,000 words and each com-
puter node, up to 32,000 words. The data link words can be either set automati-
cally or that can be set manually to more efficiently meet the needs of specific
applications using Controller Link Support Software.
• The message service can be used to send up to 2,012 bytes of data at a time.
• A Communications Board (C200HW-COM01/COM04-EV1) and a Bus Con-
nection Unit (C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012) are required to mount a Con-
troller Link Unit to a C200HX/HG/HE PC.
• The Controller Link Unit cannot be used with the C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE.

46
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Expanded System Configurations Section 2-4

PC Card Unit The PC Card Units allows you to expand PC capabilities by adding a PC card.
The PC card can be used to save and retrieve CIO, DM, EM, and other data area
contents between the CPU Unit and the PC card from the ladder-diagram pro-
gram (using the CMCR instruction). An Ethernet card can also be used to con-
nect to an Ethernet network so that data area or ladder-diagram program con-
tents can be read or written from computers on the network. Examples of PC
Card Unit Applications are shown below.
PC Card Unit PC Card Unit Ethernet Set
(C200HW-PCU01) (C200HW-PCS01-EV1)

C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit

Bus Connection Unit Bus Connection Unit
(C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012) (C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012)

Memory Ethernet Card

(SRAM, flash, ATA)
card

MAU
Hub

Computer

Computer Ethernet Unit

Note A media attachment unit (MAU) is
required to connect twisted-pair
cable to the CV-series Ethernet Unit.

• Program data read via a PC Card Unit cannot be edited on the Ladder Support
Software.
• PCMCIA2.1 PC cards are used (except for 3.3V cards). Two PC card interface
slots are provided. Up to two type I or type II cards can be mounted, or one type
III card can be mounted, enabling applications of standard SRAM, ATA, flash
memory, and other PC cards.
• A Communications Board (C200HW-COM01/COM04-EV1) and a Bus Con-
nection Unit (C200HW-CE001/CE002/CE012) are required to mount a PC
Card Unit to a C200HX/HG/HE PC.

47
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring
This section describes how to install a PC System, including mounting the various Units and wiring the System. Be sure to
follow the instructions carefully during installing. Improper installation can cause the PC to malfunction, resulting in
extremely dangerous situations.

3-1 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

3-1-1 Installation and Wiring Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3-1-2 Installing Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3-1-3 Mounting Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3-1-4 Mounting Dimensions (Units: mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3-1-5 DIN Track Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3-1-6 Mounting Units to the Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3-1-7 I/O Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3-1-8 Mounting Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3-1-9 Mounting a Communications Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3-2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3-2-1 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3-2-2 Standard I/O Unit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3-2-3 Electrical Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

49
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation Environment Section 3-1

3-1 Installation Environment

This section details the necessary environmental conditions for installing the
PC. Proper installation procedures and a proper environment are essential to
getting the best performance and reliability from your PC.

! Caution Static electricity can damage PC components. Your body can carry an electros-
tatic charge, especially when the humidity is low. Before touching the PC, be
sure to first touch a grounded metallic object, such as a metal water pipe, in order
to discharge any static build-up.

3-1-1 Installation and Wiring Precautions.

Ambient Conditions Do not install the PC in any of the following locations. Doing so will affect PC life
and may adversely affect operating performance.
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to ambient temperatures lower than 0°C or higher than 55°C
(or higher than 45°C when using a Programming Console).
• Locations subject to ambient humidity lower than 35% or higher than 85%.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tempera-
ture.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations.
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.

Cooling There are two points to consider in order to ensure that the PC does not over-
heat. The first is the clearance between the Racks, and the second is installation
of a cooling fan.

Clearance between Racks The Racks need to have sufficient room between each other to allow for I/O wir-
ing, and additional room to ensure that the I/O wiring does not hamper cooling.
The Racks must also be mounted so that the total length of the Connecting
Cable between all Racks in a given series does not exceed 12 m. As a general
rule, about 70 to 120 mm should be left between any two Racks. Consider fac-
tors such as the width of the wiring duct, wiring length, ventilation, and ease of
access to Units, when determining the spacing between Racks. Greater space
is required between Racks when using certain CPU Bus and Special I/O Units.
Refer to the operation manuals for the Units you are using for details.

50
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation Environment Section 3-1

Cooling Fan A cooling fan is not always necessary, but may be needed in some installations.
Try to avoid mounting the PC in a warm area or over a source of heat. A cooling
fan is needed if the ambient temperature may become higher than that speci-
fied. If the PC is mounted in an enclosure, install a cooling fan, as shown in the
following diagram, to maintain the ambient temperature within specifications.
Fan

PC

Louver

Noise Resistance Abide by the following precautions to help increase resistance to noise.
• Do not mount the PC in a control panel containing high-voltage equipment.
• Install the PC at least 200 mm from power lines.
• Ground the mounting plate between the PC and the mounting surface.

3-1-2 Installing Racks

The following figures show two views, each consisting of a mounted CPU Rack
and two Expansion I/O Racks. Provide a space of 20 mm minimum on the upper
and lower sides of each duct for ventilation and Unit replacement.

Example Duct Layout 118 to 153 mm

CPU

30 mm Duct
30 mm

I/O

40 mm 30 mm Duct

I/O

Each Rack must be mounted vertically, that is, with the printing on the front pan-
els oriented as it would normally read. Racks may be mounted to any sturdy sup-
port meeting the environmental specifications.
Whenever possible, the Racks should be mounted to metal-plated mounting
plate that are securely grounded. If all of the Racks cannot be mounted to the
same mounting plate, the individual plates should be securely connected
together using 3 wires of at least 2 mm2 in cross-sectional area. The Backplanes
are mounted to the plate(s) with four M4 screws each.
Whenever possible, use wiring conduit to hold the I/O wiring. Standard wiring
conduit should be used, and it should be long enough to completely contain the
I/O wiring and keep it separated from other cables.

51
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation Environment Section 3-1

Note 1. Tighten the PC Rack mounting screws, terminal block screws, and cable
screws to the torque of 1.2 N S m.
2. Always use the standard installation method. A nonstandard installation will
decrease heat dissipation, delay the replacement notification signals (par-
ticularly for the C200HW-PA204C), and may degrade or damage the inter-
nal elements.

! Caution Racks must be mounted horizontally so that the Units are upright (i.e., not upside
down or lying on their backs). The Units can overhead and malfunction if not
mounted properly.

I/O Connecting Cables Each I/O Connecting Cable can be up to 10 m long, but the sum total of all cables
between the CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Racks must be 12 m or less.
The duct work shown in the following diagram is recommended to hold I/O wir-
ing. Although optional, this duct work can be used to house the wires from the I/O
Units that run along the sides of the Racks, keeping the wires from becoming
entangled. This figure illustrates the correct way to mount the Racks.

Input duct Output duct Power duct

200 mm min.

CPU
Breakers,
Rack
fuses

Expansion
I/O Rack

Power
equipment
such as
transform-
ers and
magnetic
relays

Fuses, relays, tim-

ers, etc. (NOT
heat-generating Terminal blocks Terminal blocks for
equipment, power for PC power equipment
equipment, etc.)

Note When using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit at an ambient tempera-
ture exceeding 50°C, in order to improve air circulation, ensure that there is a

52
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation Environment Section 3-1

gap of at least 80 mm between the top of the Power Supply Unit and the top of the
panel, wiring ducts, parts, or any other structures.

Ducts, etc.
80 mm min.

C200HW-PA209R
80 mm min.
Ducts, etc.
80 mm min.
C200HW-PA209R

80 mm min.
Ducts, etc.

3-1-3 Mounting Height

The mounting height of CPU Racks, Expansion I/O Racks, or Slave Racks is
118 mm or 153 mm depending on the type of I/O Units mounted. If Peripheral
Devices or connection cables are attached, the additional dimensions must be
taken into account. Allow sufficient clearance in the control panel in which the
PC is mounted.

118 to 153* mm
Approx. 180 to 223* mm
Note: Figures marked with an asterisk are for
when the C200HW-PA209R is mounted.

53
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation Environment Section 3-1

3-1-4 Mounting Dimensions (Units: mm)

Backplanes

A±0.2 7
Four, M4

130 CPU Backplane 118±0.2

68 to 108 80 to 120

130 I/O Backplane 118±0.2

Four, M4 W

Model A W
CPU Backplane
p C200HW-BC031 246 mm 260 mm
C200HW-BC051 316 mm 330 mm
C200HW-BC081-V1 421 mm 435 mm
C200HW-BC101-V1 491 mm 505 mm
I/O Backplane
p C200HW-BI031 175 mm 189 mm
C200HW-BI051 245 mm 259 mm
C200HW-BI081-V1 350 mm 364 mm
C200HW-BI101-V1 420 mm 434 mm

Note The C200HW-PA204R/PA209R cannot be used with all combinations of CPU

Units and Backplanes. Refer to page 23, Restrictions for the C200HW-PA204R/
PA209R, for details.

54
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation Environment Section 3-1

Backplane Insulation Plates

If there is an electric potential difference between grounds when devices are
wired separately, then use a Backplane Insulation Plate. There are four models
available, corresponding to the number of slots in the Backplane. The dimen-
sions at locations A, B, C, D, and E are shown below in millimeters for each Back-
plane Insulation Plate model.

5-dia. holes for mounting

M4 screws for mounting to PC Base Insulation Plate
(4/5 places) (4/6 places)
(B) 6

12 dia.

135 (118) 110 5 dia.

C
D 10
(A)
(E)

Insulation Plates for CPU Backplanes

Specifications
p Model Dimensions (mm)
E D C B A
For 3 slots C200H-ATT31 261 210 --- --- 246
For 5 slots C200H-ATT51 331 280 --- --- 316
For 8 slots C200H-ATT81 436 385 --- --- 421
For 10 slots C200H-ATTA1 506 455 227.5 270.5 491

Insulation Plates for CPU Backplanes

Specifications
p Model Dimensions (mm)
E D C B A
For 3 slots C200HW-ATT32 190 140 --- --- 175
For 5 slots C200HW-ATT52 260 210 --- --- 245
For 8 slots C200HW-ATT82 365 315 --- --- 350
For 10 slots C200HW-ATTA2 435 385 --- --- 420

3-1-5 DIN Track Mounting

The PC may be mounted using DIN track if desired. This type of mounting is not
required, and the PC may be directly mounted to any sturdy support meeting the
environmental specifications (refer to Appendix B Specifications). If you want to
mount the PC on DIN track, you can order a DIN Track from OMRON (refer to
Appendix B Standard Models). DIN Tracks come in the two heights shown
below.

Note Never use DIN Track to mount Backplane in locations subject to vibration.

55
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation Environment Section 3-1

DIN Track Mounting Bracket The DIN Track Mounting Bracket shown below is necessary for mounting the PC
to the DIN Track.

DIN Track The following DIN Tracks are available.

Model Specification
PFP-50N 50 cm long, 7.3 mm high
PFP-100N 1 m long, 7.3 mm high
PFP-100N2 1 m long, 16 mm high

Procedure
1, 2, 3... 1. The following diagram is a view of the back of the Backplane. Attach one
Mounting Bracket to the left and right sides of the Backplane as shown
below.

Backplane

DIN Track Mounting

Bracket

There are two Backplane mounting screws each on the left

and right sides of the Backplane. Use these screws to attach
the DIN Track Mounting Brackets to the Backplane.

56
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation Environment Section 3-1

2. Mount the Backplane to the DIN Track so that the claws on the Mounting
Brackets fit into the upper portion of the DIN Track as shown below.
This claw fits into the DIN Track

DIN Track
Backplane
DIN Track Mounting Bracket

3. Loosen the screws attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Backplane. Slide
the Backplane upward as shown below so that the Mounting Bracket and
Backplane clamp securely onto the DIN Track. Tighten the screws.

DIN Track Mounting Bracket

DIN Track

Projec- Slide this screw to the top of the

Hold-down bracket
tions projection and then tighten it.

57
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation Environment Section 3-1

3-1-6 Mounting Units to the Backplane

The CPU Unit of the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE has no I/O points built in. In
order to complete the PC it is necessary to mount at least one or more I/O Units
to the Backplane. Mount the I/O Unit to the Backplane by locking the top of the
I/O Unit into the slot on the Backplane and rotating the I/O Unit downwards as
shown in the following diagram.

Hook

Backplane

Lock lever

Press down on the yellow lock lever at the bottom of the slot, press the I/O Unit
firmly into position, and then release the yellow lock lever, making sure the con-
nector on the back of the Unit is properly connected.

(To remove a Unit, hold down the lock lever with an implement such as a screw-
driver.)

58
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation Environment Section 3-1

CPU Units, I/O Power Supply Units and Slave Units must have the screws on the
bottom tightened with a Phillips screwdriver. The screwdriver must be held at a
slight angle, so be sure to leave enough space below each Rack.

Duct
20 mm min.

CPU Unit
Phillips
screwdriver Backplane
I/O Power
Supply Unit

Remote
I/O Rack
20 mm min.
Duct

59
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation Environment Section 3-1

3-1-7 I/O Connecting Cables

Each Rack must be mounted vertically, that is with the printing on the front pan-
els oriented as it would normally be read. The Racks should be mounted one
above the other with the CPU Rack uppermost as shown below.
The C200HX/HG/HE is approved by Underwriters Laboratories under the condi-
tion that, “The device must be mounted vertically for ventilation purposes.”
Connect the CPU Rack to the first Expansion I/O Rack with an I/O Connecting
Cable and then connect each Expansion I/O Rack in order, again using I/O Con-
necting Cables. Each I/O Connecting Cable can be up to 10 m long, but the sum
total of all cables between the CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Racks must be 12 m
or less.
Firmly connect the I/O Connecting Cables to the connectors on the Backplanes
and tighten the connector screws. An I/O bus error will occur stopping PC opera-
tion if any of the I/O Connecting Cables is disconnected. Be sure to connect
these Cables carefully and securely.

This connector is
not used.
Cover is with a cap.

I/O Connecting
Cable

A hole of 53 mm is diameter is required to pass the connectors on the I/O Con-

necting Cables through. This hole can be reduced to 33 mm by removing the
hood from the connector, but be sure to reassemble the connector properly and
securely, and secure it with the connector screws.
The pull strength of the Cables is 5 kg. Do not allow more than 5 kg of force to be
applied to the Cables.

Note 1. The sum of the length of all I/O Connecting Cables in one PC must be 12 m
or less.
2. Be careful to connect the Cables in the correct locations.
3. Always secure the I/O connection cables with the connector screws.

60
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation Environment Section 3-1

3-1-8 Mounting Memory Cassettes

Use the following procedure to mount a Memory Cassette.

! Caution Be careful to always turn the power off before inserting or removing a Memory
Cassette. If a Memory Cassette is inserted into or removed from the CPU Unit
with the power on, it may cause the CPU Unit to malfunction or cause damage to
the memory.

1, 2, 3... 1. Open the Memory Cassette compartment cover.

2. Press the Memory Cassette firmly to the back to mount it.

3. Close the compartment cover.

61
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation Environment Section 3-1

3-1-9 Mounting a Communications Board

! Caution Be careful to always turn the power off before inserting or removing a Commu-
nications Board. If a Communications Board is inserted into or removed from the
CPU Unit with the power on, it may cause the CPU Unit to malfunction, cause
damage to the memory, or cause errors in communications.

1, 2, 3... 1. Open the Memory Cassette compartment cover.

2. Open the Communications Board compartment cover.

3. Slid the Communications Board in on the supports and press it firmly to the
back of the compartment.

62
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

4. Close the compartment covers.

3-2 Wiring

3-2-1 Power Supply Wiring

AC Power Supply Units

Note 1. Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit before wiring. This
label is to prevent wiring clippings and other foreign matter from entering the
Unit during wiring procedures.
2. After completing the wiring, remove the protective label from the top of the
Unit before starting operation. The Unit will overheat if operated with this
label in place.

C200HW-PA204 or
C200HW-PA204S
Power Supply Unit

Screw (3.5 mm head with

self-raising pressure plate)

1:1 isolation
transformer

AC power
Voltage selector source

Note The AC input terminals may

L2/N be indicated as L1/N and L2
24-VDC output instead of L2/N and L1 on
some Units. However, there
is no difference in their func-
L1 tions or performance.
L1/N

L2

63
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

C200HW-PA204R or
C200HW-PA209R
Power Supply Unit

Screw (3.5 mm head with

self-raising pressure plate)

1:1 isolation
transformer
AC power
Voltage selector source

RUN
OUTPUT
Power RUN output
supply

C200HW-PA204C
Power Supply Unit
Screw (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)

1:1 isolation
transformer

AC power
source
(100 to
240 VAC)

24 VDC
power supply
Alarm outputs (replacement notification
outputs)
ON: Power Supply Unit replacement not
required for at least 6 months.
OFF: Power Supply Unit replacement re-
quired within 6 months.

AC Power Source
• Supply 100 to 120 or 200 to 240 VAC.
• Supply 100 to 240 VAC to the C200HW-PA204C.
• Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range
Power Supply Unit Supply voltage Allowable voltage fluctuations
model
C200HW-PA204/20 100 to 120 VAC 85 to 132 VAC
4S/204R/PA209R 200 to 240 VAC 170 to 264 VAC
C200HW-PA204C 100 to 240 VAC 85 to 264 VAC

• If one power supply phase of the equipment is grounded, connect the

grounded phase side to the L2/N (or L1/N if so indicated) terminal.

64
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

Voltage Selector Shorted: 100 to 120 VAC

Open: 200 to 240 VAC
Short-circuit the voltage selection terminals with the shorting bracket supplied
as an accessory to select 100 to 120 VAC supply voltage. For 200 to 240 VAC
leave them open.
The C200HW-PA204C has a wide-range supply voltage (100 to 240 VAC), so
voltage selector terminals are not provided.
Isolation Transformer Noise between the PC and ground can be significantly reduced by connecting a
1-to-1 isolation transformer. Do not ground the secondary coil of the transformer.
Current Consumption The current consumption will be 120 VA max. (180 VA max. with the C200HW-
PA209) per Rack, and there will be a surge current of at least 5 times the max.
current when power is turned on.
24-VDC Output Use these terminals as the power supply for 24-VDC Input Units. Never exter-
nally short these terminals; PC operation will stop if these terminals are shorted.
These terminals are available on the C200HW-PA204S only.
Although the 24-VDC output can supply up to 0.8 A, the combined power con-
sumption for both 5 V and 26 V must be 30 W or less, i.e., the capacity of the
24-VDC output will be reduced if the Units mounted to the Rack consume a lot of
current. Refer to Appendix C Unit Current and Power Consumption for the con-
sumption current of each Unit.
The output voltage of the 24-VDC output will vary with the current consumption
of the load as shown in the following table. Be sure to check the current con-
sumption and allowable voltage ranges of the devices connected before using
these terminals.
Load current on 24-VDC Less than 0.3 A 0.3 A or higher
output
Accuracy of 24-VDC output +17% +10%
for lot No. 0197 or later –11% –11%
Accuracy of 24-VDC output +10%
for lot No. 3187 or earlier –20%

Note Lot numbers are as shown in the following diagram.

0 1 9 7

1997 (Rightmost digit of year)

September (Month: 1 to 9 = Jan to Sep, X/Y/Z = Oct/Nov/Dec
01 (Day: 01 to 31)

Connect a dummy load as shown in the following diagram if the maximum oper-
ating voltage of the connected device is 26.4 V (24 V +10%).

65
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

IL

Connected
device
(Photoelectric
Dummy Switch, Sen-
load sor Input Unit,
R etc.
L
24 VDC
OUTPUT

• Resistance of the dummy load:

R=24/(0.3 – IL) (Ω)
120 Ω when IL= 0.1 A
240 Ω when IL= 0.2 A
Not necessary when IL= 0.3 A
(IL: Total current of connected devices)
• Capacity of the dummy load resistance:
W=(0.3 – IL) x 26.4 x 5 (Safety factor)
30 W (120 Ω) when IL= 0.1 A
15 W (240 Ω) when IL= 0.2 A
Note Since the dummy load will generate heat, be careful not to allow any combustible
materials to come in contact with the resistor.

RUN Output These terminals turn ON whenever the CPU Unit is operating in RUN or MON-
ITOR Mode. Use these terminals under the following specifications These termi-
nals are available on the C200HW-PA204R/PA209R only.
Model C200HW-PA204R C200HW-PA209R
Contact SPST-NO
form
Maximum 250 VAC: 2 A for resistive loads 240 VAC: 2A for resistive loads
switching 0.5 A for inductive loads 120 VAC: 0.5 A inductive loads
capacity 24VDC: 2 A 24 VDC: 2A

Crimp Terminals The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3.5, self-raising terminals with
screws. Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m.
Use round-type crimp terminals (M3.5) having the dimensions shown below.

7 mm max.

! Caution Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m. The loose screws
may result in short-circuit, malfunction, or burning.

Note 1. Supply power to all of the Power Supply Units from the same source.

66
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

2. Be sure to check the setting of the voltage selector before supplying power.
3. Do not forget to remove the label from the top of the Power Supply Unit
before turn on the power supply.

Alarm Output (C200HW-PA204C Only)

Connect the alarm output to a PC’s Input Unit or external LED indicator to enable
notification when Power Supply Unit replacement is required.
ON: Power Supply Unit replacement not required for at least 6 months.
OFF: Power Supply Unit replacement required within 6 months.
Output Specifications:
• Transistor open-collector output
• 30 VDC max., 50 mA max.
• ON: Residual voltage of 2 V max., OFF: Leakage current of 0.1 mA max.
PC Input Unit Wiring Example

Connect the positive terminals of the 24-VDC power supply to the Input Unit
common (COM) terminals.
CPU Unit C200HW-PA204C
Input Unit
C200H-ID2**

24 VDC
power supply

Connect the negative terminal of the 24-VDC power supply to the Input Unit
common (COM) terminal.
Input Unit CPU Unit C200HW-PA204C
C200H-ID2**

24 VDC
power supply

67
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

External Display Device Connection Example

The alarm output (replacement notification output) is an NC contact. Therefore,
wire the alarm output using an NC contact or other means to turn ON an error
indicator or LED display as shown in the following diagram.
Connect the positive terminals of the 24-VDC power supply to the Input Unit
common (COM) terminals.

Power
supply

Relay
(NC contact)

24 VDC
power supply

Note The OL display will also light if the PC’s power supply fails.
• Separate the alarm output cables from power lines and high-voltage lines.
• Do not apply a voltage or connect a load to the alarm output that exceeds the
rated voltage or load.
DC Power Supplies
Note 1. Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit before wiring. This
label is to prevent wiring clippings and other foreign matter from entering the
Unit during wiring procedures.
2. After completing the wiring, remove the protective label from the top of the
Unit before starting operation. The Unit will overheat if operated with this
label in place.
C200HW-PD024/C200HW-PD025
Power Supply Unit

Screw (3.5 mm head with

self-raising pressure plate)

DC power
source

Note To satisfy the EC Directives (Low-voltage

Directives), provide reinforced insulation or
double insulation for the 24-VDC power source
connected to the Power Supply Unit.

DC Power Source Supply 24 VDC. Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range (19.2 to
28.8 V).

68
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

Power Consumption The power consumption will be 40 W max. per Rack for the C200HW-PD024
and 60 W max. per Rack for the C200HW-PD025, and there will be a surge cur-
rent of at least 5 times the max. power when power is turned on.
Crimp Terminals The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3.5, self-raising terminals with
screws. Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m.
Use crimp terminals (M3.5) having the dimensions shown below.

7 mm max. 7 mm max.

Do not reverse the positive and negative poles when wiring the power supply
terminals.
Supply power to all of the Power Supply Units from the same source.
Do not forget to remove the label from the top of the Power Supply Unit before
turning on the power supply to ensure proper heat dissipation.
For satisfying the EC Directives (Low-voltage Directives), provide reinforced
insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply used for the CPU Unit.

Grounding
Power Supply Unit

L2/N

L1

To avoid electrical shock, attach a grounded (earth ground) AWG 14 wire (cross-
sectional area of at least 2 mm2) to the GR terminal. The resistance to ground
must be 100 Ω or less. Do not use a wire longer than 20 m. Care must be taken,
because ground resistance is affected by environmental conditions such as soil
composition, water content, time of year, and the length of time since the wire
was laid underground.
The Line Ground (LG) terminal is a noise-filtered neutral terminal that does not
normally require grounding. If electrical noise is a problem, however, this termi-
nal should be connected to the Ground (GR) terminal.
PC operation may be adversely affected if the ground wire is shared with other
equipment, or if the ground wire is attached to the metal structure of a building.

69
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

When using an Expansion I/O Rack, the Rack must also be grounded to the GR
terminal. The same ground can be used for all connections.

OK OK Wrong

Other Other Other

devices devices devices

Ground to 100 Ω or less. Ground to 100 Ω or less.

If grounding results in operating errors, insulate the CPU Backplane and all
Expansion I/O Backplanes from the control panel. Refer to Using the Antinoise
Insulating Attachment on page 79 for details.
Make sure that the C200HW-PA204C is wired correctly. The C200HW-PA204C
terminals are wired differently from other Power Supply Units.
Crimp Terminals The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3.5, self-raising terminals with
screws. Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m.
Use crimp terminals (M3.5) having the dimensions shown below.

7 mm max. 7 mm max.

3-2-2 Standard I/O Unit Wiring

! Caution Check the I/O specifications for the I/O Units, and consider the following points.

• Do not apply a voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units or the
maximum switching capacity for Output Units. Doing so may result in break-
down, damage or fire.
• When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, be sure to wire
them correctly.
Note To satisfy the EC Directives (Low-voltage Directives), provide reinforced insula-
tion or double insulation for the DC power source connected to the DC I/O Unit.
Use a separate power source for the DC I/O Unit from the external power supply
for the Contact Output Unit.

Electric Wires The following electric wires are recommended.

Terminal Block Connector Electric Wire Size
10-terminal AWG 22 to 18 (0.32 to 0.82 mm2)
19-terminal AWG 22 (0.32 mm2)
Note The allowable current capacity of electric wiring differs depending on factors
such as ambient temperature, insulation thickness, etc., so be sure to take these
factors into account when selecting electric wire.

Crimp Terminals The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M3.5, self-raising terminals with
screws. Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m.
Use crimp terminals (M3.5) having the dimensions shown below.

7 mm max. 7 mm max.

70
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

For satisfying the EC Directives (Low-voltage Directives), provide reinforced

insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply used for the I/O Units.
Wiring Be sure that each Unit is securely mounted. In order to prevent wire scraps and
other objects from getting inside of the Unit, keep the top-surface label on while
wiring the Unit. After the wiring has been completed, be sure to remove the label
in order to allow heat radiation.

During wiring After wiring

Remove the label.

Wire the Units so that they can be easily replaced. In addition, make sure that the
I/O indicators are not covered by the wiring.
Do not place the wiring for I/O Units together or in the same duct as power lines.
Inductive noise can cause errors in operation.
Tighten the terminal screws to the torque of 0.8 N S m.
The terminals have screws with 3.5-mm diameter heads and self-raising pres-
sure plates. Connect the lead wires to the terminals as shown below.

Terminal Blocks Unlock the terminal block of an I/O Unit to remove the terminal block from the I/O
Unit. You do not have to remove the lead wires from the terminal block in order to
remove it from an I/O Unit.

Locks for terminal block.

Unlock to remove the terminal
block from the I/O Unit. Make
sure the terminal block is
locked securely after wiring is
complete.

71
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

I/O Unit Covers A C200H-COV11 Cover is provided as an I/O Unit cover for Units that use 10P
terminal block connectors. After the I/O wiring has been completed, slide the
cover up from the bottom, as shown in the illustration below. These Covers
should be applied whenever the extra protection is required.

Attach

Remove I/O Unit cover

Input Devices
Observe the following information when selecting or connecting input devices.
DC Input Units The following types of DC input devices can be connected.

Contact output

IN DC Input Unit

COM

NPN open-collector output

+ Sensor
Power
Supply
IN DC Input Unit
Output
7 mA
COM
0V

NPN current output

+

Current
regulator
IN DC Input Unit
Output
7 mA Sensor
Power COM
0V Supply

PNP current output

+ Sensor
Power
Supply
Output
IN AC/DC Input Unit

7 mA
COM
0V

72
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

The circuit below should be used for I/O devices having a voltage output.
Voltage output

+
COM
Output
IN DC Input Unit

0V Sensor
Power
Supply

The circuit below should NOT be used for I/O devices having a voltage output.
Voltage output
Sensor
+
Power
Supply
Output
IN DC Input Unit

0V
COM

AC Input Units
Contact output

IN AC Input Unit

COM

AC Switching

IN AC Input Unit
Prox-
imity
switch
main
circuit COM

Note When using Reed switch as the input contact for an AC Input Unit, keep the
allowable current to 1 A or greater. If Reed switches with smaller allowable cur-
rents are used, the contacts may fuse due to surge currents.
Input Leakage Current When two-wire sensors, such as photoelectric sensors, proximity sensors, or
limit switches with LEDs, are used, the input bit may be turned ON erroneously
by leakage current. In order to prevent this, connect a bleeder resistor across the
input as shown below.

Input
power
supply
Bleeder R PC
resistor
Sensor

If the leakage current is less than 1.3 mA, there should be no problem. If the leak-
age current is greater than 1.3 mA, determine the resistance (R) and power rat-
ing (W) for the bleeder resistor using the following formulas.

73
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

For standard I/O Units:

I = leakage current in mA
7.2 kΩ max.
R = ––––––
2.4 x I – 3
2.3
W = ––– W min.
R

The previous calculations are based on the following equations.

Input voltge (24)

R Input current (10)
I Input voltage (24)
v OFF voltage (3)
R ) Input current (10)

Input voltage (24)

W w Input voltage (24) Tolerance (4)
R

Precautions when When using a two-wire sensor with a 12-VDC or 24-VDC input device, check
Connecting a Two-wire that the following conditions have been met. Failure to meet these conditions
DC Sensor may result in operating errors.
1, 2, 3... 1. Relation between voltage when the PC is ON and the sensor residual volt-
age:
VON x VCC – VR
2. Relation between voltage when the PC is ON and sensor control output
(load current):
IOUT (min) x ION x IOUT (max.)
ION = (VCC – VR – 1.5 [PC internal residual voltage])/RIN
When ION is smaller than IOUT (min), connect a bleeder resistor R. The
bleeder resistor constant can be calculated as follows:
R x (VCC – VR)/(IOUT (min.) – ION)
Power W y (VCC – VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin]
Note The residual voltage in the PC is 4.0 V for the following Units:
C200H-ID211/ID212/IM211/IM212, C200HS-INT01
The residual voltage is 1.5 V for all other Units.

74
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

3. Relation between current when the PC is OFF and sensor leakage current:
IOFF y Ileak
Refer to Input Leakage Current later in this section for details.
The IOFF values differ for each Unit, but is always 1.3 mA for Input Units
whose OFF current specifications are not given.

DC Input Unit

Two-wire sensor VR R RIN

VCC

VCC: Power voltage VR: Sensor output residual current

VON: PC ON voltage
IOUT: Sensor control current (load current)
ION: PC ON current
Ileak: Sensor leakage current
IOFF: PC OFF current
RIN: PC input impedance R: Bleeder resistance

Output Circuits

Output Short-circuit If a load connected to the output terminals is short-circuited, output elements
Protection and printed boards may be damaged. To guard against this, incorporate a
fuse in the external circuit.

Transistor Output Residual When connecting TTL circuits to transistor Output Units, it is necessary to con-
Voltage nect a pull-up resistor and a CMOS IC between the two. This is because of the
residual voltage left on the transistor output after the output turns OFF.

Output Leakage Current If there is a possibility of leakage current causing a transistor or triac to malfunc-
tion, connect a bleeder resistor across the output as shown below.

OUT
L
R
PC Load power supply
Bleeder resistor

COM

Determine the value and rating for the bleeder resistor using the following for-
mula.

VON
R –––
I

Where
VON = ON voltage of the load in V
I = leakage current in mA
R = bleeder resistance in kΩ

75
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

Output Surge Current When connecting a transistor or triac Output Unit to an output device having a
high surge current (such as an incandescent lamp), care must be taken to avoid
damage to the Output Unit. The transistor and triac Output Units are capable of
withstanding a surge current of ten times the rated current. If the surge current
for a particular device exceeds this amount, use the circuit shown below to pro-
tect the Output Unit.

OUT L

+
PC R

COM

Another way of protecting the Output Unit lets the load draw a small current
(about one third the rated current) while the output is OFF, significantly reducing
the surge current. This circuit (shown below) not only reduces the surge current,
but also reduces the voltage across the load at the same time.

R
OUT L

+
PC

COM

3-2-3 Electrical Noise

I/O Signal Lines

Whenever possible, place I/O signal lines and power lines in separate ducts or
tubes. If placing them together cannot be avoided, use shielded cable to mini-
mize the effects, and connect the shielded end to the GR terminal.

1 = I/O cables
2 = Power cables

Suspended duct In-floor duct Conduits

76
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

Inductive Load Surge Suppressor

When an inductive load is connected to an I/O Unit, it is necessary to connect a
surge suppressor or diode in parallel with the load as shown below. This is so
that the back EMF generated by the load will be absorbed.
IN

L Diode DC input

COM

L
OUT

Contact Output Unit

Triac Output Unit
Surge suppressor

COM

L
OUT

Contact Output Unit +

Transistor Output Unit
Diode

COM

Note Use surge suppressors and diodes with the following specifications.
Surge Suppressor
Resistance: 50 Ω
Capacitor: 0.47 µF
Voltage: 200 V
Diode
Leading-edge peak inverse voltage: At least 3 times load voltage
Average rectified current: 1A

77
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

External Wiring
If power cables must be run alongside the I/O wiring (that is, in parallel with it), at
least 300 mm must be left between the power cables and the I/O wiring as shown
below.

Low current cable

1

300 mm min.
Control cable
2

300 mm min.
Power cable
3

Class-3 ground

Where: 1 = I/O wiring

2 = General control wiring
3 = Power cables
If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct (for example,
where they are connected to the equipment), they must be shielded from each
other using grounded metal plates.
Metal plate (iron)

200 mm min.
1 2 3

Class-3 ground

Where: 1 = I/O wiring

2 = General control wiring
3 = Power cables

Interlock Circuits
When the PC controls an operation such as the clockwise and counterclock-
wise operation of a motor, provide an external interlock such as the one
shown below to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs from turning
ON at the same time.

Interlock circuit

MC2
00501
MC1 Motor clockwise

PC
MC1
00502
MC2 Motor counterclockwise

78
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

This circuit prevents outputs MC1 and MC2 from ever both being ON at the same
time. Even if the PC is programmed improperly or malfunctions, the motor is pro-
tected.

Using the Antinoise Insulating Attachment

When using the C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit near a power supply system,
unwanted current paths may cause operating errors. If this occurs, use an Anti-
noise Insulating Attachment. If this Attachment is connected to the CPU Back-
plane and all Expansion I/O Backplanes, the PC will be insulated from the con-
trol panel. This will prevent external noise from entering the PC.
Antinoise Insulating Attachments must be purchased separately using the fol-
lowing model number.
Model Quantity
C200HW-ATT01 Four attachments included

Dimensions (Unit: mm)

7.8 dia.
Insulating Method for Backplanes
As shown in the following diagram, connect the Attachments to the control panel
first (four locations) and then tighten the screws. The recommended tightening
torque is 1.2 N S m.
Control panel

Attachment Screw

Backplane

Precautions
• Always attach the Attachments as shown above.
• When the Attachments are used to mount the Backplanes, the height of the
Rack will be increased by approximate 10 mm. Confirm that the front of the
Units, cables, or other parts of the PC do not come into contact with other
devices.
• If the installation environment is subject to noise, then noise can also enter on
the power supply line. If necessary, use noise filters or insulating transformers
to remove noise from the power supply line.

Power Interruptions
A sequential circuit is built into the PC to handle power interruptions. This circuit
prevents malfunctions due to momentary power loss or voltage drops. A timing
diagram for the operation of this circuit is shown below.
The PC ignores all momentary power failures if the interruption lasts no longer
than 10 ms (no longer than 2 ms for a DC Power Supply). If the interruption lasts

79
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Section 3-2

between 10 and 25 ms (between 2 and 5 ms for a DC Power Supply), the inter-

ruption may or may not be detected. If the supply voltage drops below 85% of the
rated voltage for longer that 25 ms (less for the DC Power Supply), the PC will
stop operating and the external outputs will be automatically turned OFF.
Operation is resumed automatically when the voltage is restored to more than
85% of the rated value. The diagram below shows the timing of PC operation
and stopping during a power interruption. The time it takes to detect the power
failure is shorter when the power supply is DC. Also, the voltage value for which
the C200HX/HG/HE will stop due to a drop in the power supply voltage will be
lower than that for AC.
Power Power
interrupted restored
Power supply
Time lapse until
Power failure detection signal detection

+5 V
CPU Unit operating voltage

Power supply reset

80
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 SECTION 4
Programming Console Operation
This section describes the function of the Programming Console and its connection methods.

4-1 Using the Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

4-1-1 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4-1-2 Connecting the Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4-2 Checking Initial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

81
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Using the Programming Console Section 4-1

4-1 Using the Programming Console

4-1-1 Nomenclature
The front panel of the Programming Console is shown below, taking the
C200H-PRO27-E as an example.

C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console

LCD area

Mode selector switch

Instruction keys

Numeric keys

Cassette jacks Operation keys

LCD Area This window displays the program contents and monitor status.

Mode Selector Switch PROGRAM MODE: Used for creating programs.

RUN MODE: Used for executing the programs.
MONITOR MODE: Used for monitoring PC status.

Keys Instruction, numeric, and operation keys are used for inputting the program and
data.
Note 1. The operations of C200H-PRO27-E and CQM1-PRO01-E Programming
Consoles are the same.
2. The following keys look different but have the same functions.

AR
HR
HR

PLAY
SET
SET

REC
RESET
RESET

82
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Using the Programming Console Section 4-1

4-1-2 Connecting the Programming Console

There are two Programming Console models that can be used with the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE: the C200H-PRO27-E and the CQM1-PRO01-E. The follow-
ing illustration shows how a Programming Console (a C200H-PRO27-E in this
case) connects to the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Unit.

C200H-CN222 or C200H-CN422
Connecting Cable

C200H-PRO27-E
Programming Console

As indicated in the illustration, the C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console

connects to the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Unit with C200H-CN222 (2 m)
or C200H-CN422 (4 m) Connecting Cable, which must be purchased sepa-
rately.
The CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console comes with 2 m of Connecting
Cable.

83
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Checking Initial Operation Section 4-2

4-2 Checking Initial Operation

After the Programming Console has been connected, it can be used to check
initial C200HX/C200HG/C200HE operation. Make sure that the Programming
Console is properly connected and that the correct power supply is being pro-
vided, and then follow the procedure outlined below.
1, 2, 3... 1. Check to be sure that the Programming Console is in PROGRAM mode.
MONITOR
RUN PROGRAM

2. Turn on the power to the PC and check the CPU Unit indicators. The green
POWER indicator should light.

3. Check the Programming Console display and input the password (Clear
and then Monitor Keys). If operation is normal, the display should appear as
shown below.

<PROGRAM>
PASSWORD

<PROGRAM> BZ

Indicates the mode set by the mode selector switch.

Note If the mode is not indicated, turn off and restart the power supply.
4. After checking PC operation, turn off the power. If operation is not normal,
refer to 5-1 Troubleshooting.

84
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 SECTION 5
Troubleshooting, Inspections, and Maintenance
The C200HX/C200HG/C200HE provides self-diagnostic functions to identify many types of abnormal system conditions.
These functions minimize downtime and enable quick, smooth error correction.
This section provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PC operation. It also provides inspection
and maintenance information that can be used to help prevent the occurrence of errors.

5-1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5-2 Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5-2-1 Replacing Output Unit Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5-2-2 Replacing Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5-2-3 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5-3 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5-4 Using Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

85
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Troubleshooting Section 5-1

5-1 Troubleshooting
CPU Racks and Expansion I/O Racks
Error Probable cause Possible correction
POWER indicator does not light. The voltage selector terminal setting is Correct the voltage selector terminal
wrong. (A 100-VAC voltage is used setting.
when set to 200 VAC.)
The 24-V output terminals are Correct the wiring.
externally shorted.
An internal fuse has blown. Replace the Power Supply Unit.
The Power Supply Unit is broken. (A
200-VAC voltage was used when set
to 100 VAC.)
There is a short-circuit in the internal Replace the Unit with the short-circuit.
power supply. (There is a short-circuit
in the 5/26-VDC supplied by the
Power Supply Unit in a Unit on the
Rack.)
RUN indicator does not light. The program has an error (no END Correct the program.
instruction).
A power supply line is defective. Replace the CPU Unit.
Special I/O Units are assigned Correct the unit number assignments.
overlapping unit numbers.
A Slave Unit’s power supply is turned Turn on the power to the Slave Unit,
off, or no Unit is set as the terminator. or set a Unit as the terminator.
RUN indicator is lit, but RUN output The power circuit is defective. Replace the CPU Unit.
does not turn on.
Relays do not operate from a The I/O bus is defective. Replace the Backplane.
particular number onwards.
Outputs (or inputs) turn ON for
particular Relay numbers.
All the bits from a particular Unit turn
ON.

86
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Troubleshooting Section 5-1

Input Units
Error Probable cause Possible correction
Indicator lights are turned off, and no No external input power supply is Provide a power supply.
inputs
pu s turn
u ON.O provided.
The external input voltage is low. Supply the rated voltage.
Terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
Indicator lights are turned ON, but no The input circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
inputs turn ON.
All inputs remain ON, and will not turn The input circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
OFF.
Inputs
p do not turn ON for p
particular An input device is defective. Replace the input device.
R l numbers.
Relay b Input wiring is disconnected. Check the input wiring.
Terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
The ON time for external inputs is too Adjust the input device.
short.
The input circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
An input bit address is used for an Correct the program.
OUT instruction in the program.
Inputs
p do not turn OFF for particular
p The input circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
R l numbers.
Relay b An input bit address is used for an Correct the program.
OUT instruction in the program.
Inputs
p are turning
g ON and OFF The external input voltage is low. Supply the rated voltage.
i
irregularly.
l l There is malfunctioning due to noise. Apply noise countermeasures such as
installing a surge suppressor,
installing an isolation transformer, and
using shielded cables.
Terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
Malfunctioning
g Relays
y are in g
groups
p of Common terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
i h
eight. Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
The CPU Unit is defective. Replace the CPU Unit.
Operation is normal, but the input The LED is defective. Replace the Unit.
indicator does not light.

87
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Troubleshooting Section 5-1

Output Units
Error Probable cause Possible correction
No outputs
p turn ON. A load power supply is not provided. Provide the power supply.
The load power supply voltage is low. Provide the rated voltage.
Terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
A fuse is blown. Replace the fuse.
I/O bus connectors are making poor Replace the Unit.
contact.
The output circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
Outputs all fail to turn OFF. The output circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
Indicators do not light,
g , and the outputs
p The output ON time is too short. Correct the program.
f particular
for i l Relay
R l numbers b do
d not The output circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
turn ON.
ON
The program’s OUT instruction bit Correct the program.
addresses overlap.
Indicators light,
g , but the outputs
p for An output device is defective. Replace the output device.
particular
i l R Relay
l numbers
b d
do not turn Output wiring is disconnected. Check the output wiring.
ON
ON.
Terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
Output Relays are defective. Replace the Relays.
The output circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
Indicator lights
g are off,, but the outputs
p Output Relays are defective. Replace the Relays.
f particular
for i l Relay
R l numbers b d not
do There is faulty restoration due to Replace the external load or add a
turn OFF. leakage current or residual current. dummy resistor.
Indicators light,
g , and the outputs
p for The output circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
particular
i l R Relay
l numbers
b d
do not turn The program’s OUT instruction bit Correct the program.
OFF. addresses overlap.
Outputs
p are turning
g ON and OFF The load power supply voltage is low. Supply the rated voltage.
i
irregularly.
l l The program’s OUT instruction bit Correct the program.
addresses overlap.
There is malfunctioning due to noise. Apply noise countermeasures such as
installing a surge suppressor,
installing an isolation transformer,
using shielded cables, or attaching the
Insulating Attachments.
Terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
Malfunctioning
g Relays
y are in g
groups
p of Common terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
i h
eight. Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
A fuse is blown. Replace the fuse.
The CPU Unit is defective. Replace the CPU Unit.
Operation is normal, but the output The LED is defective. Replace the Unit.
indicator does not light.

88
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Inspection and Maintenance Section 5-2

5-2 Inspection and Maintenance

5-2-1 Replacing Output Unit Fuses
The following Output Units each contain one fuse. Replace the fuse if the fuse
indicator lights. The OD211, OD212, OA222, and OA224 Output Units do not
have fuse indicators. Replace the fuses on these Units if outputs are not pro-
duced.
Unit Fuse indicator Capacity
(20 mm long x 5.2 mm dia.)
C200H-OD411 Yes 125 V,, 5 A
C200H-OD211 No
C200H-OD212 No 125 V,, 8 A
C200H-OD213 Yes
C200H-OA221 Yes 250 V, 5 A
C200H-OA222V No 250 V, 3 A
C200H-OA223 Yes 250 V, 5 A
C200H-OA224 No 250 V, 3.15 A

The OD411, OD213, OA221 and OA223 Output Units also provide an external
output bit that can be used to check the condition of the fuse. If bit 08 of the word
allocated to the Unit is ON, the fuse is burnt out.
To replace a fuse, follow the steps below. Use only UL/CSA certified replace-
ment fuses.
1, 2, 3... 1. Turn OFF the power to the PC.
2. Detach the terminal block by unlocking the lock levers at the top and bottom
of the terminal block.
3. While pushing down the lock lever on the Backplane with a screwdriver as
shown below, remove the Output Unit.

Lock lever

89
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Inspection and Maintenance Section 5-2

4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screw from the top of the Unit.
5. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the case from the Unit.

(4)

(5)

6. Pull out the printed circuit board.

7. Insert a new fuse. A spare fuse is provided inside the rear of the case when
the Unit is delivered.

Rear of the case

Spare fuse

8. Reassemble in reverse order of assembly.

Note 1. Use UL or CSA approved fuses if the UL or CSA standards must be satis-
fied. For further details, consult the fuse manufacturer.
2. Fuses in High-density I/O Units cannot be replaced by the user. Refer to
your OMRON dealer for service.

5-2-2 Replacing Relays

Replacement Relay The following Output Units provide relay sockets that allow the Relays to be
replaced if they should go bad. Use the Relay listed in the table.
Output Unit Relay
C200H-OC221 G6B-1174P-FD-US
C200H-OC222 24 VDC
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC222V G6R-1, 24 VDC
C200H-OC224V
C200H-OC226

Use the following procedure to replace a Relay.

Note The relays on the C200H-OC222N, C200H-OC224V, and C200H-OC226 can-
not be replaced.

1, 2, 3... 1. Turn OFF the power to the PC.

2. Detach the terminal block by unlocking the lock levers at the top and bottom
of the terminal block.

90
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Inspection and Maintenance Section 5-2

3. While pushing down the lock lever on the Backplane with a screwdriver as
shown below, remove the Output Unit.

Lock lever

4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screw from the top of the Unit.
5. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the case from the Unit.

(4)

(5)

6. Pull out the printed circuit board. The Relays are placed on the PC boards of
individual Units as shown in the figures below.
7. A Relay puller is provided inside the rear of the case when the Unit is deliv-
ered. Use the Relay puller to pull out the Relay as shown below. Insert a new
Relay.
Relays for the C200H-OC222V/OC224V/OC226V can be replaced without
using the Relay puller.

Relay puller
Using the Relay puller,
pull the Relay up and out
of the socket.

Printed circuit board

8. Reassemble in reverse order of assembly.

91
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Inspection and Maintenance Section 5-2

! Caution Check the pin arrangement before inserting a new Relay into the socket. Pins
can only be inserted one way, so do not try to force them if they do not go in easily.
Applying too much force can bend the pins and render them unusable.

OC221/OC224

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

OC222

0
1
2
3
5 4
7 6
9 8
11 10

OC223

0
1
2
3
4

OC225

1 0
3 2
5 4
7 6
9 8
11 10
13 12
15 14

OC222V

0
2 1
4 3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

92
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Inspection and Maintenance Section 5-2

OC224V

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

OC226

1 0
3 2
5 4
7 6
9 8
11 10
13 12
15 14

Note The relays on the C200H-OC222N, C200H-OC224V, and C200H-OC226 can-

not be replaced.

5-2-3 Batteries
! DANGER Batteries can burn, explode, or leak. Absolutely do not short-circuit across the
terminals, attempt to recharge batteries, or take them apart, heat them, or
expose them to fire.

When the battery is nearly discharged, the ERR indicator will flash and the mes-
sage “BATT FAIL” will appear on the Programming Console. When this occurs,
replace the battery within one week to avoid loss of data.
The normal battery service life is five years at 25°C. The service life will be
shorten if used at higher temperatures.
The Battery Fail Flag is allocated to 25308 for the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE.
The battery comes together with its connector as a set. To replace the Battery
Set (C200H-BAT09), follow the steps below. The entire replacement must be
completed within five minutes to ensure that the data will not be lost.
1, 2, 3... 1. Turn OFF the power to the PC. (If the power was not already ON, turn the
power ON for at least one minute before turning the power OFF.)
2. Remove the cover from the battery compartment of the CPU Unit.
3. Remove the old Battery Set.
4. Install the new Battery Set as shown in the following diagram.

93
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Inspections Section 5-3

5. Replace the cover of the battery compartment.

6. Press CLR, FUN, MONTR, MONTR or just turn the power to the PC OFF
and then ON again to clear the error message on the Programming Con-
sole.

5-3 Inspections
Daily and periodic inspections are required to keep PCs working in top condition.
PC are constructed out of semiconductor components, which although have an
extremely long life time, can deteriorate under improper environmental condi-
tions. Periodic inspections are thus required to ensure that the required condi-
tions are being kept.
Inspection is recommended at least once every six months to a year, but more
frequent inspections will be necessary in adverse environments.
Take immediate steps to correct the situation if any of the conditions in the follow-
ing table are not met.
No. Item Contents Criteria Remarks
1 Main power Check the voltage fluctuations at The voltage must be within the Voltage tester
supply the power supply terminals. allowable voltage fluctuation (see
following table)
2 Ambient Measure the temperature inside Temperature must be 0 to 55 _C. Thermometer
e o e
environment the control panel.
Measure the humidity inside the Humidity must be 35% to 85%. Humidity meter
control panel.
Check for dirt and dust. There must be no collection of dirt Visual
and dust.
3 I/O power Check the voltage fluctuations at Voltages must be within Voltage tester
supply the I/O terminals. specifications for each Unit.
4 Installation Check the mounting of all Units. The Units must be firmly mounted. Phillips
screwdriver
Check all cable connections. The cables must be firmly connected. Phillips
screwdriver
Check all external wiring screws. The screws must be firmly tightened. Visual
Check all external wiring cables. The cables must not be damaged in Visual
any way.
5 Consumable Contact output Relays: Electrical life ---
parts G6B-1174P-FD-US Resistive loads: 300,000 operations
24 VDC Inductive loads: 100,000 operations
Mechanical life: 50 million operations
Battery: C200H-BAT09 Expected life: 5 yrs at 25 _C ---

Voltage Fluctuation Power supply voltage Allowable voltage fluctuation

100 to 120 VAC 85 to 132 VAC
200 to 240 VAC 170 to 264 VAC
24 VDC 19.2 to 28.8 VDC

Handling Precautions
• Always turn off the power supply before replacing a Unit.
• After replacing a faulty Unit, check the new Unit to make sure that the same
problem does not appear again.
• When returning a Unit for repairs, provide as many details about the problem
as possible in writing and attach it to the Unit before delivering it to your
OMRON representative. (See inside back cover for regional offices.)
• To clean bad contacts, use a clean cotton cloth soaked in industrial alcohol and
be sure to remove any threads from the cloth before mounting the Unit.

94
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Using Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification Section 5-4

Inspection Tools
• Required Tools
• Screwdrivers (flat-blade and Phillips)
• Voltage tester (analog or digital)
• Industrial alcohol and a clean cotton cloth
• Tools Required in Special Cases
• Synchroscope
• Oscilloscope with pen plotter
• Thermometer and humidity meter

5-4 Using Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification

Be sure to check the display when using a C200HW-PA204C Power Supply Unit
with Replacement Notification.
For details on the Unit’s functions, displays, and contact outputs, refer to Appen-
dix E Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification.

95
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Appendix A
Standard Models

CPU Rack
Name Specifications Model number
CPU Units ((All models are p
pro- UM EM I/O points RS-232C ---
vided
id d with
i h clock
l k function
f i and d slots
l 3.2K words None 640 No C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE
for communications except
CPU11-E/ZE.) 7.2K words 880 No C200HE-CPU32-E/ZE
Yes C200HE-CPU42-E/ZE
15.2K words 6K words 880 No C200HG-CPU33-E/ZE
(1 b
bank)
k) Yes C200HG-CPU43-E/ZE
1,184 No C200HG-CPU53-E/ZE
Yes C200HG-CPU63-E/ZE
31.2K words 18K words 880 No C200HX-CPU34-E/ZE
b k )
(3 banks) Yes C200HX-CPU44-E/ZE
1,184
, No C200HX-CPU54-E/ZE
Yes C200HX-CPU64-E/ZE
63.2K words 48K words 1,184 Yes C200HX-CPU65-ZE
(8 banks)
96K words 1,184 Yes C200HX-CPU85-ZE
(16 banks)
Power Supply Units Power supply voltage: C200HW-PA204
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (selectable)
Output: 4.6 A at 5 V, 0.625 A at 26 V
Power supply voltage: C200HW-PA204S
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (selectable)
Output: 4.6 A at 5 V, 0.625 A at 26 V
External output:
Output terminals, 0.8 A at 24 VDC
Power supply voltage: C200HW-PA204R
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (selectable)
Output: 4.6 A at 5 V, 0.625 A at 26 V
RUN output (SPST-NO contact):
Switching capacity: 2 A for resistive loads/0.5 A
for inductive loads at 250 VAC; 2 A at 24 VDC
See page 23 for CPU Unit and Backplane restrictions.
Power supply voltage: C200HW-PA209R
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (selectable)
Output: 9.0 A at 5 V, 0.6 A at 26 V
RUN output (SPST-NO contact):
Switching capacity: 2 A for resistive loads at 240
VAC; 0.5 A for inductive loads at 120 VAC; 2 A
at 24 VDC
See page 23 for CPU Unit and Backplane restrictions.

97
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

Name Specifications Model number

Power Supply Units (Equipped Power supply voltage: C200HW-PA204C
with replacement notification func- 100 to 240 VAC (wide range)
tion) Output: 4.6 A at 5 V, 0.625 A at 26 V
Alarm output with replacement notification function
Transistor (open collector)
Switching capacity:50 mA max. at 30 VDC max.

Power Supply Units Power supply voltage: C200HW-PD024

24 VDC
Output: 4.6 A at 5 V, 0.625 A at 26 V
Power supply voltage: C200HW-PD025
24 VDC
Output: 5.3 A at 5 V, 1.3 A at 26 V
CPU Backplanes
p 3 slots C200HW-BC031
5 slots C200HW-BC051
8 slots (see note) C200HW-BC081-V1
10 slots (see note) C200HW-BC101-V1

Note There are restrictions in combining Backplanes and Power Supply Units
when using the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit with an 8-slot or 10-slot
CPU Backplane or Expansion I/O Backplane.
Name Specifications Model number
Memory
y Cassettes EEPROM 4K words C200HW-ME04K
8K words C200HW-ME08K
16K words C200HW-ME16K
32K words C200HW-ME32K
64K words (see note) C200HW-ME64K
EPROM 16K words/32K words C200HS-MP16K
Equivalent to 27256, 150 ns, 12.5 V ROM-JD-B
Equivalent to 27512, 150 ns, 12.5 V ROM-KD-B
Communication Boards (See Communications port for SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC C200HW-COM01
note.)) NET Link Units
RS-232C port C200HW-COM02-V1
RS-422/485 port C200HW-COM03-V1
Communications port for the SYSMAC LINK Unit and C200HW-COM04-EV1
SYSMAC NET Link Unit and a protocol macro function
Two RS-232C ports and a protocol macro function C200HW-COM05-EV1
RS-422/485 port, an RS-232C port, and a protocol macro C200HW-COM06-EV1
function
PC Card Unit Two interface slots for PMCIA2 PC cards. C200HW-PCU01

Ethernet expansion function included C200HW-PCS01-EV1

Controller Link Unit A separate Bus Connection Unit is required. C200HW-CLK21

Note: Use the V1 Communications Boards for the C200HZ/HG/HE-CPUjj-ZE CPU Units. The C200HW-
COM01 can also be used.

98
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

Expansion I/O Racks

Name Specifications Model number
Power Supply
pp y Units 100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC C200HW-PA204
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (with 24-VDC output terminals) C200HW-PA204S
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC C200HW-PA204R
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC C200HW-PA209R
24 VDC C200HW-PD024
I/O Backplanes 3 slots C200HW-BI031
5 slots C200HW-BI051
8 slots C200HW-BI081-V1
10 slots C200HW-BI101-V1
I/O Connecting
g Cables 30 cm The total length
g of the I/O Connecting
g Cables C200H-CN311
70 cm used
d in
i a networkk must be
b 12 m maximum.
i C200H-CN711
2m C200H-CN221
5m C200H-CN521
10 m C200H-CN131

Slave Racks
Name Specifications Model number
Slave Remote I/O Slave 100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (switchable) APF/PCF C200H-RT001-P
Racks Units
24 VDC C200H-RT002-P

100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (switchable) Wired C200H-RT201

24 VDC C200H-RT202

I/O Blocks Input Specify either 12 or 24 VDC. G71-IC16

Output G71-OD16
I/O AC input Specify either 100 or 200 VAC. G7TC-IA16
T i l
Terminals DC input Specify either 12 or 24 VDC. G7TC-ID16
Output Specify either 12 or 24 VDC. G7TC-OC16

99
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

I/O Units
Name Specifications Model number
Input Units AC Input Units 8 pts 100 to 120 VAC C200H-IA121

16 pts 100 to 120 VAC C200H-IA122/IA122V

8 pts 200 to 240 VAC C200H-IA221

16 pts 200 to 240 VAC C200H-IA222/IA222V

DC Input Units 8 pts 12 to 24 VDC C200H-ID211

16 pts 24 VDC C200H-ID212

AC/DC Input Units 8 pts 12 to 24 VAC/DC C200H-IM211

16 pts 24 VAC/DC C200H-IM212

Interrupt Input Unit 8 pts 12 to 24 VDC C200HS-INT01

(see note)

Output Relay Output Units 8 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads) C200H-OC221
Units
12 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads) C200H-OC222/OC222N

5 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads) C200H-OC223

Independent commons

8 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads) C200H-OC224/OC224N

Independent commons

16 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (for resistive loads) C200H-OC225/OC226N

(see note)

Triac Output Units 8 pts 1 A, 120 VAC C200H-OA121-E

8 pts 1 A, 200 VAC C200H-OA221

12 pts 0.3 A, 200 VAC C200H-OA222V

8 pts 1.2 A, 250 VAC C200H-OA223

12 pts 0.5 A, 250 VAC C200H-OA224
Transistor Output 8 pts 1 A, 12 to 48 VDC C200H-OD411
Units
12 pts 0.3 A, 24 VDC C200H-OD211
16 pts 0.3 A, 24 VDC (see note) C200H-OD212
8 pts 2.1 A, 24 VDC C200H-OD213
8 pts 0.8 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); w/load C200H-OD214
short protection
8 pts 0.3 A, 5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP) C200H-OD216
12 pts 0.3 A, 5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP) C200H-OD217
16 pts 1.0 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load C200H-OD21A
short protection
Analog Timer Unit 4 timers 0.1 to 1 s/1 to 10 s/10 to 60 s/1 min to 10 C200H-TM001
min (switchable)

Variable Connector w/lead wire (2 m) for 1 external resistor C4K-CN223

Resistor
Connector

100
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

Name Specifications Model number

B7A Interface Units 15 or 16 Connects to B7A Link Terminals. Standard C200H-B7AI1
input pts transmission delay.
16 Connects to B7A Link Terminals. Standard C200H-B7AO1 (see
output transmission delay. note)
pts

Note 1. If the Interrupt Input Unit is mounted on an Expansion I/O Rack, the interrupt function cannot be used
and the Interrupt Input Unit will be treated as an ordinary 8-point Input Unit. Moreover, Interrupt Input
Units cannot be used on Slave Racks. In addition, Interrupt Input Units require that a version 2 (i.e., mod-
el numbers with a “-V2” suffix) Backplane be used at the CPU Rack. If an earlier version Backplane is
mounted, the interrupt function cannot be used. When mounting the C200H-OC225, C200H-OD212, or
C200H-B7AO1 to a Backplane, make sure that the model number of the Backplane includes the suffix
“-V1” or “-Vj.” The C200H-OC225, C200H-OD212, or C200H-B7AO1 cannot be mounted to any Back-
plane the model number of which does not include the suffix “-V1” or “-Vj.”
2. The C200H-OC225 can overheat if more than 8 outputs are turned ON simultaneously.

Group-2 I/O Units

Name Specifications Model number
DC Input Units 64 pts 12 VDC C200H-ID111
32 pts 24 VDC C200H-ID216
64 pts C200H-ID217
32 pts C200H-ID218
64 pts C200H-ID219
Transistor Output 32 pts 16 mA at 4.5 V to 100 mA at 26.4 V C200H-OD218
Units
32 pts C200H-OD219
32 pts 0.5 A (5 A/Unit) at 24 VDC C200H-OD21B
B7A Interface Units 32 input Connects to B7A Link Terminals. C200H-B7A12
pts S a da d o
Standard g speed transmission
or high-speed a s ss o
32 output pts delay. C200H-B7A02
16 input and C200H-B7A21
16 output
points
32 input and C200H-B7A22
32 output
points

101
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

Special I/O Units

Name Specifications Model number
High-density
g y DC Input
p Units 32 pts 5 VDC (TTL inputs); w/high-speed input C200H-ID501
I/O Units
U i 32 pts 24 VDC; w/high-speed input C200H-ID215
(see note 1)
Transistor Output 32 pts 0.1 A, 24 VDC (useable as 128-point C200H-OD215
Units
U s dynamic output unit)
32 pts 35 mA, 5 VDC (TTL outputs) (useable as C200H-OD501
128-point dynamic output unit)
DC Input/Transistor 16 input and 16 24-VDC inputs; w/high-speed input; 0.1-A, C200H-MD215
Output Units output pts 24-VDC outputs (useable as 128-point
dynamic input unit)
16 input and 16 5-VDC TTL inputs; w/high speed input; C200H-MD501
output pts 35-mA, 5-VDC TTL outputs (useable as
128-point dynamic input unit)
16 input and 16 12-VDC TTL inputs; w/high speed input; C200H-MD115
output pts 12-VDC TTL outputs (useable as
128-point dynamic input unit)
Analogg I/O Analog
g Input
p Units 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10 V (switchable); 4 inputs; 12 bits C200H-AD001
U i
Units 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable); 8 inputs; C200H-AD002
12 bits or BCD
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable); 8 inputs; C200H-AD003
16 bits
Analog
g Output
p Units 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10 V (switchable); 2 outputs C200H-DA001
4 to 20 mA, –10 to 10 V; 4 outputs C200H-DA002
1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable); 8 outputs C200H-DA003
4 to 20 mA; 8 outputs C200H-DA004
Mixed Analog I/O 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable); 2 inputs; C200H-MAD01
Units 16 bits
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable);
2 outputs
Fuzzy Logic Unit Programmed using the Fuzzy Support Software. Up to 8 C200H-FZ001
inputs and 4 outputs.
Fuzzy Support Available on either 3.5” or 5.25” floppy disks. C500-SU981-E
Software

Temperature
p Sensor Units Thermocouple
p K(CA) or J(IC), switchable; 4 inputs C200H-TS001
K(CA) or L(Fe-CuNi) DIN standards; C200H-TS002
4 inputs
Pt resistance Pt 100 Ω; 4 inputs C200H-TS101
h
thermometer Pt 100 Ω; 4 inputs; DIN and 1989 JIS C200H-TS102
standards
Temperature
p Control Units Thermocouple
p Transistor output C200H-TC001
Voltage output C200H-TC002
Current output C200H-TC003
Pt resistance Transistor output C200H-TC101
thermometer
Voltage output C200H-TC102
Current output C200H-TC103
Heat/Cool Thermocouple
p Transistor output C200H-TV001
T
Temperature
t Control
C t l Units
U it
Voltage output C200H-TV002
Current output C200H-TV003
Pt resistance Transistor output C200H-TV101
thermometer
Voltage output C200H-TV102
Current output C200H-TV103

102
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

Name Specifications Model number

Cam Positioner Unit Detects angles of rotation by means of a resolver and C200H-CP114
provides ON and OFF outputs at specified angles. A
maximum of 48 cam outputs (16 external outputs and 32
internal outputs) maximum are available.

Data Setting Console Used to set and monitor data in Temperature Control Units, C200H-DSC01
Cam Positioner Units, PID Control Units, and Heat/Cool
Temperature Control Units.
Connecting
g Cables 2m C200H-CN225
4m C200H-CN425
PID Control Units Transistor output; 4 to 20 mA/1 to 5 V/0 to 5V/0 to 10 V C200H-PID01
inputs (selectable)
Voltage output; 4 to 20 mA/1 to 5 V/0 to 5V/0 to 10 V inputs C200H-PID02
(selectable)
Current output; 4 to 20 mA/1 to 5 V/0 to 5V/0 to 10 V inputs C200H-PID03
(selectable)
Position Control Units 1 axis Pulse output; speeds: 1 to 100,000 pps C200H-NC111
1 axis Pulse output; directly connects to C200H-NC112
servomotor driver; compatible with line
driver; speeds: 1 to 250,000 pps
2 axis Pulse output; speeds: 1 to 250,000 pps, C200H-NC211
53 pts per axis
1 axis Pulse train output; directly connects to C200H-NC113
servomotor driver
2 axis Pulse train output; directly connects to C200H-NC213
servomotor driver
4 axis Pulse train output; directly connects to C200H-NC413
servomotor driver
Motion Control Unit G-language programmable 2-axis analog outputs C200H-MC221
MC Support Software IBM PC/AT or compatible CV500-ZN3AT1-E
Connecting cable 3.3 m CQM1-CIF02
Teaching Box --- CVM1-PRS71
Connection cable for 2 m long CV500-CN224
Teaching Box
Memory Pack (with --- CVM1-MP701
key sheet) (see note
2)
Terminal Block Simplifies wiring for I/O connectors. XW2B-20J6-6
Conversion Unit
Connecting cable for XW2Z-100J-F1
Terminal Block
Conversion Unit
High-speed Counter Units 1 axis Pulse input; counting speed: 50 kcps; 5 C200H-CT001-V1
VDC/12 VDC/24 VDC
1 axis Pulse input; counting speed: 75 kcps; C200H-CT002
RS-422 line driver
2 axes Pulse input; counting speed: 75 kcps; C200H-CT021
RS-422 line driver; 7-digit BCD
ASCII Unit 24K-byte RAM and 24K-byte EEPROM are built-in. C200H-ASC02

103
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

Name Specifications Model number

ID Sensor Units Local application, electromagnetic coupling C200H-IDS01-V1
Remote application; microwave transmissions C200H-IDS21
Read/Write Heads Electromagnetic type V600-H series
Microwave type V620-H series
Data Carriers SRAM type for V600-H series. V600-DjjRjj
EEPROM type for V600-H series. V600-DjjPjj
Voice Unit (see note 3) 60 messages max.; message length: 32, 48, or 64 s C200H-OV001
(switchable)

Connecting Cable RS-232C C200H-CN224

Note: 1. When mounting a High-density I/O Unit as a Special I/O Unit to a Slave Rack, the Remote I/O Master
must be the C200H-RM001-PV1 or C200H-RM201.
2. The CV-series Programming Console can be used as a Teaching Box by replacing the Memory Pack of
the Programming Console.
3. Observe the following points when using the C200H-OV001 Voice Unit:
• The C200H-OV001 Voice Unit cannot be used when an OMRON display device (Programmable Termi-
nal) is connected to the peripheral port or the RS-232C port of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) CPU Unit in NT Link
mode. Connect the Programmable Terminal to the serial communications port of a C200HW-COMjj
Communications Board.
• When using a C200H-OV001 Voice Unit mounted on the PC, set the baud rate of the CPU Unit’s periph-
eral port or RS-232C port to 9,600 bps or less (regardless of the serial communications mode).

104
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

Communication Units
Name Specifications Model number
SYSMAC LINK Unit A Bus Connection Unit must be ordered Data link table: C200HW-SLK23
(coaxial cable) sepa aey
separately. 918 words
Data link table: C200HW-SLK24
2,966 words
Terminator One required for each node at ends of System. C1000H-TER01
Attachment Provided with SYSMAC LINK Unit. C200H-TL001
Stirrup
F Adapter To connect network C1000H-CE001
F Adapter To connect network C1000H-COV01
Cover
SYSMAC LINK Unit Connect with H-PCF cable. A Bus Data link table: C200HW-SLK13
(optical fiber cable) Co ec o Unit
Connection U must
us be ordered
o de ed 918 words
separately. Data link table: C200HW-SLK14
2,966 words
Power Supply Required when supplying backup power For 1 or 2 C200H-APS03
Adapter Units
Power Cable Connects Power Supply
pp y Adapter
p and SYSMAC For 1 Unit C200H-CN111
NET Li
Link
kU Unit.
i For 2 Units C200H-CN211
SYSMAC LINK Support To connect IBM PC/AT or compatible as node in SYSMAC LINK 3G8F5-SLK21-E
Board (coaxial cable) system
SYSMAC NET Link Unit A Bus Connection Unit must be ordered separately. C200HS-SNT32
Power Supply
pp y Required
q when supplying
pp y g backup
p power
p For 1 Unit C200H-APS01
Ad
Adapter For 2 Units C200H-APS02
Power Cable Connects Power Supply Included with For 1 Unit C200H-CN001
Adapter
dap e aanddSSYSMAC
S C NET C200H-APS01
Link Unit. Included with For 2 Units C200H-CN002
C200H-APS02
Bus Connection Units Connects SYSMAC LINK Unit or SYSMAC NET For 1 Unit C200HW-CE001
Link Unit to C200HW COM01/COM04 E
C200HW-COM01/COM04-E
Communications Board For 2 Units C200HW-CE002

Host Link Units Rack-mounting C200H, C200HS, APF/PCF C200H-LK101-PV1

C200HE,
C200HG, C200HX RS-422 C200H-LK202-V1

RS-232C C200H-LK201-V1

PC Link Unit Single level: 32 Units RS-485 C200H-LK401

Multilevel: 16 Units

DeviceNet Master Unit --- C200HW-DRM21

CompoBus/S Master Unit --- C200HW-SRM21

105
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

Name Specifications Model number

Remote I/O Master Up to two per PC; connectable to up to 5 Slaves APF/PCF C200H-RM001-PV1
Units per PC total

Wired C200H-RM201

Remote I/O Slave Units See Racks at beginning of product lists.

Controller Link Unit Enables data link and message communications. C200HW-CLK21
Communications Board and Bus Connection Unit are required
separately.
PC Card Unit Compatible with the PMCIA2.1 and provided with two PC Card I/F C200HW-PCU01
slots. Ethernet extension function added. C200HW-PCS01

Other Wired Remote I/O System Products

Name Specifications Model number
Remote I/O Interface Input Either 12 or 24 VDC G71-IC16
Output G71-OD16
I/O Blocks AC Input Unit Either 120 or 240 VAC. G7TC-IA16
DC Input Unit Either 12 or 24 VDC G7TC-ID16
Output Unit Either 12 or 24 VDC G7TC-OC16

SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK Hardware

Name Specifications Model number
SYSMAC NET Network Support Board For IBM PC/AT or compatible S3200-NSB11-E
SYSMAC LINK Network Support For IBM PC/AT or compatible, coaxial cable connector 3G8F5-SLK21-E
Board

Link Adapters
Name Specifications Model number
Link Adapters 3 RS-422 connectors 3G2A9-AL001
3 optical connectors (APF/PCF) 3G2A9-AL002-PE
3 optical connectors (PCF) 3G2A9-AL002-E
1 connector for RS-232C; 2 for RS-422 3G2A9-AL003
1 connector each for APF/PCF, RS-422, and RS-232C 3G2A9-AL004-PE
1 connector each for PCF, RS-422, and RS-232C 3G2A9-AL004-E
1 connector each for APF/PCF and AGF 3G2A9-AL005-PE
1 connector each for PCF and AGF 3G2A9-AL005-E
1 connector for APF/PCF; 2 for AGF 3G2A9-AL006-PE
1 connector for PCF; 2 for AGF 3G2A9-AL006-E
O/E converter; 1 connector for RS-485, 1 connector each for B500-AL007-P
APF/PCF
Used for on-line removal of SYSMAC NET Link Units from the B700-AL001
SYSMAC NET Link System, SYSMAC NET Optical Link Adapter 3
connectors for APF/PCF.

106
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

Optical Fiber Products

Optical Fiber Cable for SYSMAC NET and SYSMAC LINK
H-PCF Optical Fiber Cable with Connectors
System Appearance Model number
SYSMAC NET S3200-CNjjj-20-20
SYSMAC LINK

S3200-CNjjj-20-25

S3200-CNjjj-20-62

S3200-CNjjj-25-25

S3200-CNjjj-25-62

S3200-CNjjj-62-62

Model Numbers
The above cable model numbers specify the type of cable, the length, and the type of connectors attached.

S3200-CNjjj-20-25
1. 2. 3.

1. S3200-CN specifies H-PCF optical fiber cable.

2. The boxes (jjj) are replaced by codes indicating the standard model lengths, as shown below.
Consult with your OMRON representative for longer cables. When ordering longer cables, omit the portion
represented by the boxes and specify the length in meters separately, e.g., S3200-CN-20-20, 30 m.
Code Length Code Length
201 2m 152 15 m
501 5m 202 20 m
102 10 m Omitted Over 20 m

3. The last two portions of the model numbers (e.g., 20-25) specify the connectors, as shown below.
Code Connector
20 S3200-COCF2011
25 S3200-COCF2511
62 S3200-COCH62M

107
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

Applicable Optical Fiber Connectors

Model number/Appearance
pp Applicable Units
SYSMAC NET SYSMAC LINK
S3200-COCF2011 CV500-SNT31 CV500-SLK11
C1000H-SLK11

S3200-COCF2511 C200HS-SNT32 C200HW-SLK13/14

S3200-COCH62M S3200-LSU03-01E ---

S3200-NSUA1-00E
S3200-NSUG4-00E
S3200-NSB11-E
C500-SNT31-V4
B700-AL001

All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable for SYSMAC BUS/SYSMAC WAY

Name Specifications Model number Standards
All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable Cable only; order desired length in 5 m increments 3G5A2-PF002 ---
between 5 and 100 m, or in increments of 200 m or
500 m.
Optical Connectors A Two optical connectors (brown) for APF (10 m max.) 3G5A2-CO001
Optical Connectors B Two optical connectors (black) for APF (8 to 20 m) 3G5A2-CO002
All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable 1-m cable with an Optical Connector A connected to 3G5A2-PF101
Set each end
Optical Fiber Processing Kit Accessory: 125-mm nipper (Muromoto Tekko’s 550M) 3G2A9-TL101
for APF

Plastic Clad Optical Fiber Cable for SYSMAC BUS/SYSMAC WAY

Name Specifications Model number Standards
Plastic Clad Optical Fiber 0.1 m, w/connectors Ambient temp: 3G5A2-OF011 ---
Cables (indoor) –10°
10° to 70°C
1 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF101
2 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF201
3 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF301
5 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF501
10 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF111
20 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF211
30 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF311
40 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF411
50 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF511
Cable only; order desired length be- 3G5A2-OF002
tween 1 and 500 m in increments of
1 m.
Cable only; order desired length be- Ambient temp:
tween 501 and 800 m in increments 0° to 55°C (do
of 1 m. not expose to
direct sunlight)

108
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

H-PCF Optical Fiber Cables (For SYSMAC NET, SYSMAC LINK, and SYSMAC BUS)
Name Specifications Model number Stan-
dards
Optical Fiber Cables 10 m, black Composite S3200-HCLB101 ---
SYSMAC NET,NET SYSMAC LINK cable including
50 m, black S3200-HCLB501
two-core cable
100 m, black and two-core S3200-HCLB102
power supply
500 m, black S3200-HCLB502
cable
1,000 m, black S3200-HCLB103
10 m, orange S3200-HCLO101
50 m, orange S3200-HCLO501
100 m, orange S3200-HCLO102
500 m, orange S3200-HCLO502
1,000 m, orange S3200-HCLO103
Optical Fiber Cables 10 m, black Two-core cable S3200-HCLB101 ---
SYSMAC NET,NET SYSMAC LINK
LINK,
50 m, black S3200-HCCB501
SYSMAC BUS, SYSMAC WAY
100 m, black S3200-HCCB102
500 m, black S3200-HCCB502
1000 m, black S3200-HCCB103
10 m, orange S3200-HCCO101
50 m, orange S3200-HCCO501
100 m, orange S3200-HCCO102
500 m, orange S3200-HCCO502
1,000 m, orange S3200-HCCO103
10 m, black Two-core cord S3200-HBCB101 ---
50 m, black S3200-HBCB501
100 m, black S3200-HBCB102
500 m, black S3200-HBCB502
1,000 m, black S3200-HBCB103
Optical Fiber Cable Connector SYSMAC NET: Full-lock con- S3200-COCH62M ---
S3200-LSU03-01E nector for NSU,
B700-AL001 NSB,, and C500
C500-SNT31-V4 SYSMAC NET
Link Unit
SYSMAC BUS: Half-lock con- S3200-COCH82
C200H-RM001-PV1 nector for Re-
C200H-RT001/RT002-P mote I/O Mas-
C500-RM001-(P)V1 ter, Remote I/O
C500-RT001/RT002-(P)V1 Slave, Host Link
3G2A9-jjj(-P) Unit, and Link
Adapter
SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK Half-lock con- S3200-COCF2511
C200HS-SNT32 nector
C200HW-SLK13/14
SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK Full-lock con- S3200-COCF2011
CV500-SNT31 nector
CV500-SLK11
CV1000H-SLK11
To relay at all SYSMAC NET COCF62M and S3200-COCF62M
nodes
nodes. COCF62F are
used as a pair. S3200-COCF62F

Note: 1. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.

109
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

2. If the user prepares and connects optical fiber cables, the user must take a seminar held under the aus-
pices of Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd. and obtain a proper certificate.
3. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber Set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required to
connect optical fiber cables.
4. You may want to use the Plastic Clad Optical Fiber Cable/All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable with connectors
listed on the previous two pages.
Optical Fiber Assembling Tool
Name Specifications Model number Stan-
dards
Optical Fiber Assembling Tool Used to connect H-PCF and crimp-cut connectors S3200-CAK1062 ---
for optical transmission systems such as the
SYSMAC C- and CV-series SYSMAC BUS,
SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET.

Note: 1. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.

2. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required to
connect optical fiber cables.
Optical Power Tester
Name Specifications Head Unit Model number Stan-
dards
Optical Power Tester (see note) SYSMAC NET: S3200-CAT200 S3200-CAT2000 ---
(provided with a connector CV500-SNT31 2 (provided with
adapter, light source unit, small C200HS-SNT32 the Tester)
single head plug,
single-head plug hard case
case,
and AC adapter) SYSMAC LINK: S3200-CAT270 S3200-CAT2700
CV500-SLK11 2 (provided with
C200HW-SLK13/14 the Tester)
CV1000H-SLK11
SYSMAC BUS: S3200-CAT282 S3200-CAT2820
C200H-RM001-PV1 2 (provided with
C200H-RT001/RT002-P the Tester)
C500-RM001-(P)V1
C500-RT001/RT002-(P)V1
SYSMAC NET: S3200-CAT320 S3200-CAT3200
S3200-LSU03-01E 2 (provided with
C500-SNT31-V4 the Tester)

Note: There is no difference between the light source unit and connector adapter for the Head Unit and those for
the Optical Power Tester.
Head Unit
Name Specifications Model number Stan-
dards
Head Units (a set consisting of SYSMAC NET: S3200-CAT2002 ---
light source unit and connector CV500-SNT31
adapter) C200HS-SNT32
(see note)
SYSMAC LINK: S3200-CAT2702
CV500-SLK11
C200HW-SLK13/14
CV1000H-SLK11
SYSMAC BUS: S3200-CAT2822
C500-RM001-(P)V1
C500-RT001/RT002-(P)V1
C200H-RM001-PV1
C200H-RT001/RT002-PV1
SYSMAC NET: S3200-CAT3202
S3200-LSU03-01E
C500-SNT31-V4

110
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

Note: Use a proper Head Unit model for the optical module to be used. If two types of optical modules (unit type
and board type) are used, order an Optical Power Tester plus a proper Head Unit model.
Master Fiber Set
Name Specifications Model number Stan-
dards
Master Fiber Sets (1 m) S3200-CAT3202 (SYSMAC NET, NSB, NSU, S3200-CAT3201 ---
Bridge)
S3200-CAT2002/CAT2702 (SYSMAC NET, SYS- S3200-CAT2001H
MAC LINK)
S3200-CAT2822 (SYSMAC BUS) S3200-CAT2821

Note: 1. The Master Fiber Set is used in combination with the Optical Power Tester to check the optical levels of
optical fiber cables connected to optical fiber cable connectors.
2. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.
3. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required to
connect optical fiber cables.

Programming Devices
Name Specifications Model number Stan-
dards
Programming Consoles Hand-Held, w/backlight C200H-PR027-E U, C

2-m Connecting Cable included CQM1-PRO01-E U, C

Programming Console Used to attach Hand-held Programming Console to a C200H-ATT01 ---

Mounting Bracket panel.

Programming Console For Hand-held Programming Con- 2m C200H-CN222 ---

Connecting Cables sole

4m C200H-CN422 ---

Data Setting Console Used for data input and process value display for the C200H-DSC01
C200H-TCjjj, C200H-TVjjj, C200H-CP114,
and C200H-PID0j.

Data Setting Console For C200H-DSC01 2m C200H-CN225

Connecting Cables
4m C200H-CN425

Connecting Cable Used to connect an IBM PC/AT or 3.3 m CQM1-CIF02 ---

compatible to the C200HX/HG/HE.

111
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

Optional Products
Name Specifications Model number Standards
I/O Unit Cover Cover for 10-pin terminal block C200H-COV11 ---

Terminal Block Cov- Short protection for 10-pin terminal block (package of 10 cov- C200H-COV02
ers ers); 8 pts
Short protection for 19-pin terminal block (package of 10 cov- C200H-COV03
ers); 12 pts
Connector Cover Protective cover for unused I/O Connecting Cable connectors C500-COV01

Space Unit Used for vacant slots C200H-SP001 N, L

Battery Set For C200H or C200HS RAM Memory Unit only C200H-BAT09 ---

Relay 24 VDC G6B-1174P-FD-US ---

Backplane Insula- For C200HW-BC031 (3-slot CPU Backplane) C200H-ATT31 ---

tion Plates
For C200HW-BC051 (5-slot CPU Backplane) C200H-ATT51
For C200HW-BC081-V1 (8-slot CPU Backplane) C200H-ATT81
For C200HW-BC101-V1 (10-slot CPU Backplane) C200H-ATTA1
For C200HW-BI031 (3-slot I/O Backplane) C200HW-ATT32
For C200HW-BI051 (5-slot I/O Backplane) C200HW-ATT52
For C200HW-BI081-V1 (8-slot I/O Backplane) C200HW-ATT82
For C200HW-BI101-V1 (10-slot I/O Backplane) C200HW-ATTA2
I/O Brackets For 3-slot Backplane C200H-ATT33 N
For 5-slot Backplane C200H-ATT53
For 8-slot Backplane C200H-ATT83
For 10-slot Backplane C200H-ATTA3 ---
External Connectors Solder terminal; 40p and a Connector Cover C500-CE401 ---
Solderless terminal; 40p and a Connector Cover (Crimp-type) C500-CE402 ---
Pressure welded terminal; 40p C500-CE403 ---
Solder terminal; 40p and a Connector Cover (Horizontal-type) C500-CE404 ---
Crimp-style terminal; 40p and a Connector Cover (Horizontal- C500-CE405 ---
type)

112
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Models Appendix A

Mounting Rails and Accessories

Name Specifications Model number Standards
DIN Track Mounting 1 set (2 included) C200H-DIN01 ---
Bracket

DIN Tracks Length: 50 cm; height: 7.3 cm PFP-50N

Length: 1 m; height: 7.3 cm PFP-100N
Length: 1 m; height: 16 mm PFP-100N2
End Plate --- PFP-M

Spacer --- PFP-S

Note: Order DIN Tracks, End Plates, and Spacers in units of 10 each.
SYSMAC-CPT Support Software
Name Specifications Model number Stan-
dards
SYSMAC Support Soft- 3.5”, 2HD for IBM PC/AT compatible C500-ZL3AT1-E ---
ware (for C20, CjjP, Note: Version 1.0 doesn’t support the additional
CjjK, C120, CjjH, functions of the C200HX/HG/HE.
C200H, C200HS,
C200HE, C200HG,
C200HX, C500, C1000H,
C2000H, CQM1, and
CVM1)

Protocol Support Software

Name Specifications Model number Stan-
dards
Protocol Support Software 3.5”, 2HD for IBM PC/AT compatible C200HW-ZW3AT1-E ---

Training Materials
Name Specifications Model number Stan-
dards
SYSMAC Training System Includes text book, cassette tape, and input C200H-ETL01-E ---
switch board.
Fuzzy Training System Includes a Fuzzy Training System Manual, a Main C200H-ETL13-E ---
Unit, a C200H-MR831 Memory Unit, a
C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console, a
C200H-CN222 Cable for the Programming Con-
sole, C500-SU981-E Fuzzy Training Software, an
RS-232C Cable, and a carrying belt.

113
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Appendix B
Specifications

The following figures and tables provide specifications for each Unit of the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. I/O Units
may take on one of two different shapes and are sometimes referred to as A-shape Units or B-shape Units.
Group-2 High-density I/O Units take on one of two different shapes and are sometimes referred to as C-shape
Units or D-shape Units. Refer to the figures at the end of the I/O Unit specifications for the exact dimensions of
these two shapes of I/O Unit.

General Specifications
Item Specifications
Power Supply C200HW- C200HW- C200HW- C200H- C200HW- C200HW- C200HW-
Unit PA204 PA204S PA204R PA209R PA204C PD024 PD025
Supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC/200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 100 to 240 VAC 24 VDC 24 VDC
(wide range),
50/60 Hz
Operating 85 to 132 VAC/170 to 264 VAC 85 to 264 VAC, 19.2 to 19.2 to
voltage range 47 to 63 Hz 28.8 VDC 28.8 VDC
Power 120 VA max. 180 VA max. 100 VA max. 40 W max. 60 W max.
consumption
Inrush current 30 A max. 30 A max. at 15 A max. at 30 A max. 30 A max.
100 to 120 VAC 100 to 120 VAC
(cold start at
40 A at 200 to
room
240 VAC
temperature)
30 A max. at
200 to 240 VAC
(cold start at
room
temperature)
Output capacity 5 VDC, 4.6 A (including power supply to the CPU 5 VDC, 9 A Same as for 5 VDC, 4.6 A 5 VDC, 5.3 A
(see note 9) Unit) (including C200HW-PA20 (including (including
power supply to 4. power supply to power supply to
the CPU Unit) the CPU Unit) the CPU Unit)
26 VDC, 26 VDC, 26 VDC, 26 VDC, 1.3 A 26 VDC, 26 VDC, 26 VDC, 1.3 A
0.625 A 0.625 A 0.625 A Total: 45 W 0.625 A 0.625 A Total: 40 W
Total: 30 W 24 VDC, 0.8 A Total: 30 W Total: 30 W Total: 30 W
Total: 30 W
(see note 1)
Output Without With Without Without Without Without
terminals (see note 2)
RUN output Without SPST-NO SPST-NO Without Without Without
(see note 6) contact contact
Switching Switching
capacity: capacity:
2 A at 250 VAC 2 A at 240 VAC
(resistive load), (resistive load),
0.5 A at 250 0.5 A at 120
VAC (inductive VAC (inductive
load), 2 A at 24 load), 2 A at 24
VDC VDC (resistive
load), 2 A at 24
VDC (inductive
load)
Replacement Without Without Without With Without Without
notification
Alarm output
function
(open-collector
output)
50 mA max. at
30 VDC max.

115
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Power Supply C200HW- C200HW- C200HW- C200H- C200HW- C200HW- C200HW-

Unit PA204 PA204S PA204R PA209R PA204C PD024 PD025
Insulation AC: 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between external terminals and GR AC: 20 MΩ DC: 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
resistance terminal (see note 3) min. (at 500 between external terminals and
VDC) between GR terminal (see note 3)
all external
terminals and
GR terminal,
and between all
output
terminals
DC: 20 MΩ
min. (at 250
VDC) between
all alarm output
terminals and
GR terminal
Dielectric AC: 2,300 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between external terminals and AC: 2,300 VAC, DC: 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1
strength (see GR terminals with a leakage current of 10 mA max. (see note 3) 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between external
note 8) minute between terminals and GR terminals with a
all external leakage current of 10 mA max.
terminals and (see note 3)
GR terminal
and between all
alarm output
terminals with a
leakage current
of 10 mA max.
DC: 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between external terminals and DC: 1,000 VAC,
GR terminals with a leakage current of 10 mA max. (see note 3) 50/60 Hz for 1
minute between
all alarm output
terminals and
GR terminal
with a leakage
current of 10
mA max.
Noise immunity 1,500 Vp-p, pulse width: 100 ns to 1 µs, rise time: 1 ns pulse (by noise Same as for Same as for C200HW-PA204.
simulator) C200HW-PA20
4.
(Conforms to
IEC61000-4-4,
2 kV power
supply line.)
Vibration JIS C0040 conforming,10 to 57 Hz; 0.075 mm amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz (see note 4); acceleration: 9.8 m/s2, in X, Y, and Z
resistance directions, for 80 minutes each (sweep time 8 min x 10 sweeps = 80 min); (When mounted on DIN track, 2 to 55 Hz, 2.94
m/s2, in X, Y, and Z directions, for 20 minutes each)
Shock JIS C0041 conforming, 147 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions, 3 times each
resistance
Ambient Operating: 0° to 55°C; storage: –20° to 75°C (without battery) Same as for Same as for C200HW-PA204.
temperature C200HW-PA20
4.(see note 7)
Humidity 10% to 90% (without condensation) Same as for Same as for C200HW-PA204.
C200HW-PA20
4. (see note 7.)
Atmosphere Must be free of the following:
• Corrosive gases
• Abrupt temperature changes
• Direct sunlight
• Dust, salt, or metal filings
• Water, oil, or chemicals
Grounding Class 3 ground
Enclosure Mounted in a panel
rating
Weight 6 kg max.

116
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Power Supply C200HW- C200HW- C200HW- C200H- C200HW- C200HW- C200HW-

Unit PA204 PA204S PA204R PA209R PA204C PD024 PD025
Dimensions 2-slot Rack: 198.5 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD) Same as for Same as for C200HW-
(CPU Racks) 3-slot Rack: 260 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD) C200HW- PA204.
(See note 5.)
5-slot Rack: 330 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD) PA204.
8-slot Rack: 435 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD) Note: If the
10-slot Rack: 505 x 130 x 118 (WxHxD) C200HW-
Note: If the C200HW-PA209R/PD025 is used, D will be PA204C is
153 mm in the above dimensions. used, D will
be 111 mm
in the dimen-
sions.

Note 1. For C200HW-PA204S, the total also includes the power consumption of the power supply output termi-
nals.
2. The output voltage of the 24-VDC output will vary with the current consumption of the load as shown in
the following table. Be sure to check the current consumption and allowable voltage ranges of the de-
vices connected before using these terminals. (The combined power consumption for 5 V, 26 V, and
24 V (24-VDC output on PA204S) must be 30 W or less.)
Load current on 24-VDC Less than 0.3 A 0.3 A or higher
output
Accuracy of 24-VDC output +17% +10%
for lot No. 0197 or later –11% –11%
Accuracy of 24-VDC output +10%
for lot No. 3187 or earlier –20%
Lot numbers are as shown in the following diagram.
0 1 9 7

1997 (Rightmost digit of year)

September (Month: 1 to 9 = Jan to Sep, X/Y/Z = Oct/Nov/Dec
01 (Day: 01 to 31)

3. Internal components can be damaged if insulation resistance or dielectric strength tests are conducted
with the LG and GR terminals connected.
4. Vibration Resistance

Acceleration (m/s2)

9.8

Amplitude
0.075 mm

10 57 150
Frequency (Hz)
5. Dimensions (Unit: mm)

117
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

6. RUN output is only available when the Power Supply Unit is mounted on the CPU Backplane.
7. Maintain an ambient storage temperature of –20 to 30_C and relative humidity of 25% to 70% when
storing the product for longer than 3 months to keep the replacement notification function in optimum
working condition.
8. Change the applied voltage gradually using the adjuster on the Tester. If dielectric strength voltage is
suddenly applied or turned OFF using the switch on the Tester, the generated impulse voltage may dam-
age the Power Supply Unit.
9. The Power Supply Unit’s internal parts may deteriorate or be damaged if the Unit is used outside the
power supply output capacity range for a long period of time or if the output is short-circuited.

CPU Unit Specifications

Control Method Stored program
I/O Control Cyclic scan and immediate processing are both possible.
Method
Programming Ladder diagram
Method
Instruction Length 1 address/instruction, 1 to 4 words/instruction
Number of C200HE-CPUjj-E: 14 basic instructions + 231 special instructions
Instructions C200HE-CPUjj-ZE: 14 basic instructions + 286 special instructions
Execution Time Basic instructions: C200HE-CPUjj-E/ZE: 0.3 µs min.
C200HG-CPUjj-E/ZE: 0.15 µs min.
C200HX-CPUjj-E/ZE: 0.1 µs min.
Special instructions: C200HE-CPUjj-E/ZE: 1.2 µs min.
C200HG-CPUjj-E/ZE: 0.6 µs min.
C200HX-CPUjj-E/ZE: 0.4 µs min.
Program Capacity C200HE-CPU11-E/ZE: 3.2K words max.
C200HE-CPU32-E/42-E/ZE: 7.2K words max.
C200HG-CPUjj-E/ZE: 15.2K words max.
C200HX-CPUj4-E/ZE: 31.2K words max.
C200HX-CPUj5-ZE: 36.2K words max.
IR Area: I/O bits 640 bits (00000 through 02915, 30000 through 30915)
IR Area: Work bits 6,528 bits (03000 through 23515, 31000 through 51115)
SR bits 1,016 (23600 through 25507 and 25600 through 29915)
TR bits 8 (TR 0 through 7)
HR bits 1,600 (HR 0000 through 9915)
AR bits 448 (AR 0000 through 2715)
LR bits 1,024 (LR 0000 through 6315)
Timers/Counters 512 (TIM/CNT 000 through 511)
DM words Read/write: 6,144 (DM 0000 through 6143)
Read only: 512 (DM 6144 through 6655)
3,000 words max. (DM 7000 through 9999)
Expansion DM Read/write
C200HE-CPUjj-E/ZE: None
C200HG-CPUjj-E/ZE: 6,144 words (EM 0000 to EM 6143)
C200HX-CPUjj-E/ZE: 6,144 words × 3 banks (EM 0000 to EM 6143)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE: 6,144 words × 8 banks (EM 0000 to EM 6143)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE: 6,144 words × 16 banks (EM 0000 to EM 6143)
Power Failure Holds HR, AR, CNT, and DM, EM and clock (RTC) contents.
Backup Function
Memory Backup The battery service life is five years at 25°C. The service life will be shortened if the battery is used
Time at higher temperatures.
Replace the battery within one week after the battery alarm indicator starts blinking. When
replacing the battery, install the new battery within five minutes after removing the old one.
Self-diagnostic CPU errors (watchdog timer), I/O verification errors, host link errors, memory errors, battery errors,
Function I/O bus errors, remote I/O errors, etc.
Program Check Carries out program checks at the beginning of operation for items such as no END instruction,
Function instruction errors, and so on.

118
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

RS-232C Port Specifications

RS-232C Specifications The specifications for the RS-232C port are given below. Devices that meet
these specifications can be connected.
Connector Pin Assignments
Pin assignments for the RS-232C port are given in the following table.
Pin Abbreviation Name Direction
1 1 FG Field ground ---
6
2 SD (TXD) Send data Output
3 RD (RXD) Receive data Input
9
4 RS (RTS) Request to send Output
5 5 CS (CTS) Clear to send Input
6 --- Not used. ---
7 --- Not used. ---
8 --- Not used. ---
9 SG Signal ground ---
Connector fitting FG Field ground ---

System Configurations

IBM PC/AT or compatible

(9-pin male connector) C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Unit

Plug: XM2D-0901
(9-pin female) RS-232C
port

Hood: XM2S-0913
Recommended
cable Hood: XM2S-0911-E Plug: XM2A-0901 (9-pin male)

Provided with CPU Unit

Connections
The connections between the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE and a personal com-
puter are illustrated below as an example.
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE Personal Computer
Signal Pin Pin Signal
No. No.
FG 1 1 CD
SD 2 2 RD
RD 3 3 SD
RS 4 4 ER
CS 5 5 SG
– 6 6 DR
– 7 7 RS
– 8 8 CS
SG 9 9 CI
Shielded cable
D-sub, 9-pin connector D-SUB, 9-pin connector
Male connector on cable Female connector on cable

119
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Applicable Connectors
The following connectors are applicable. One plug and one hood are included
with the CPU.
CPU Unit Connector
Item Model Specifications
Plug XM2A-0901 9-pin male Used together
g ((One
Hood XM2S-0911-E 9-pin, millimeter off each
h provided
id d
screws, with CPU Unit.)
static-resistant

Personal Computer Connector

Item Model Specifications
Plug XM2D-0901 9-pin female Used together
g
Hood XM2S-0913 9-pin, inch screws

Port Specifications
Item Specification
Communications method Half duplex
Sync Start-stop
Baud rate 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, or 19,200 bps
Transmission method Point to point
Transmission distance 15 m max.
Interface EIA RS-232C

One-to-one Link Connections The RS-232C port on the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE can be connected to the
same port on another C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. Wire the cable as shown in
the diagram below.
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE C200HS
Signal Pin Pin Signal
Abb. No. No. Abb.
FG 1 1 FG
SD 2 2 SD
RD 3 3 RD
RS 4 4 RS
CS 5 5 CS
– 6 6 –
– 7 7 –
– 8 8 –
SG 9 9 SG

XM2A-0901 XM2A-0901

Ground the FG terminals of C200HX/C200HG/C200HE Units at a resistance of

less than 100 Ω.

120
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

C200H Standard I/O Units

Name Specifications Model number Shape

Input
p DC Input Units 8 pts 12 to 24 VDC C200H-ID211 A
U i
Units 16 pts 24 VDC C200H-ID212 B
AC Input Unit 8 pts 100 to 120 VAC C200H-IA121 A
16 pts 100 to 120 VAC C200H-IA122/IA122V B
8 pts 200 to 240 VAC C200H-IA221 A
16 pts 200 to 240 VAC C200H-IA222/IA222V B
AC/DC Input
p 8 pts 12 to 24 VAC/DC C200H-IM211 A
U i
Unit 16 pts 24 VAC/DC C200H-IM212 B
Output
p Contact Output
p 8 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC221 A
U i
Units U i
Unit 12 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC222 B
16 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VAC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC225
5 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC223 A
Independent commons
8 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC224 B
Independent commons
12 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC222N
16 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC226N Extended
B-shape
8 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC224N B
Independent commons
Transistor 8 pts 1 A, 12 to 48 VDC C200H-OD411 A
O
Output Unit
U i 12 pts 0.3 A, 24 VDC C200H-OD211 B
16 pts 0.3 A, 24 VDC C200H-OD2122
8 pts 2.1 A, 24 VDC C200H-OD213 A
8 pts 0.8 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with C200H-OD214
load short protection
8 pts 5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP) C200H-OD216
12 pts 5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP) C200H-OD217 B
16 pts 1.0 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with C200H-OD21A
load short protection
Triac Output
p 8 pts 1 A, 250 VAC C200H-OA221 A
U i
Unit 8 pts 1.2 A 250 VAC C200H-OA223 E
12 pts 0.3 A, 250 VAC C200H-OA222V B
12 pts 0.5 A, 250 VAC C200H-OA224
Interrupt Input Unit1 8 pts 12 to 24 VDC C200HS-INT01 ---
Standard B7A Interface 16 input Connects to B7A Link Terminals. C200H-B7AI1
U s
Units pts
16 out- C200H-B7AO1
put pts
Analog Timer Unit 4 timers 0.1 to 1 s/1 to 10 s/10 to 60 s/1 min to 10 C200H-TM001
min (switchable)
Variable Resis- Connector w/lead wire (2 m) for 1 external resistor C4K-CN223
tor Connector

Note 1. If the Interrupt Input Unit is mounted on an Expansion I/O Rack, the interrupt function cannot be used
and the Interrupt Input Unit will be treated as an ordinary 8-point Input Unit. Moreover, Interrupt Input
Units cannot be used on Slave Racks. Use a C200HW-BCjj1 Backplane.

2. The Unit can overheat if more than 8 outputs are turned ON simultaneously.

121
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Optional Products
Name Specifications Model number
I/O Unit Cover Terminal cover for 8-point or 5-point I/O Units C200H-COV11
Connector Cover Protective cover for unused Backplane connectors C500-COV01
Space Unit Used to hold space for an I/O Unit. C200H-SP001

Note 1. When ordering, specify the model name (any component of which is not sold separately).
2. Order the press-fit tool from the manufacturer.

Standard I/O Units

DC Input Unit C200H-ID211
Rated Input Voltage 12 to 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 2 kW
Input Current 10 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 10.2 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 1.5 ms max. (at 12/24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 1.5 ms max. (at 12/24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (8 point/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 200 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 2 kW

0.01 1.8 Internal

mF kW Circuit
COM

12 to 24 VDC

Input indicator

Terminal Connections
0
A0
1
A1
2
A2
3
A3
12 to 24 VDC 4
A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
COM
A8
NC A9

122
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

DC Input Unit C200H-ID212

Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 3 kW
Input Current 7 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 1.5 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 1.5 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 3 kW

0.01 1.8 Internal

mF kW Circuit
COM

24 VDC

Input indicator

Terminal Connections

B0 0
1
A0 2
3 B1
A1 4
5 B2
A2 6
7 B3
A3 8
24 VDC 9 B4
A4
11 B5 10
A5
13 B6 12
A6
15 B7 14
A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

123
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

AC Input Unit C200H-IA121

Rated Input Voltage 100 to 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Operating Input Voltage 85 to 132 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance 9.7 kW (50 Hz), 8 kW (60 Hz)
Input Current 10 mA typical (at 100 VAC)
ON Voltage 60 VAC min.
OFF Voltage 20 VAC max.
ON Response Time 35 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 55 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 0.33 mF 470 W
100 to
120 VAC
Internal
330 kW Circuit
COM 910 W

Input indicator

Terminal Connections
0
A0
1
A1
2
A2
3
100 to A3
120 VAC 4
A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
COM
A8
NC A9

124
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

AC Input Unit C200H-IA122/IA122V

Rated Input Voltage 100 to 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Operating Input Voltage 85 to 132 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance 9.7 kW (50 Hz), 8 kW (60 Hz)
Input Current 10 mA typical (at 100 VAC)
ON Voltage 60 VAC min.
OFF Voltage 20 VAC max.
ON Response Time 35 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 55 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max./400 g max. (IA122V)
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 0.33 mF 470 W
100 to
120 VAC
Internal
330 kW Circuit
COM 910 W

Input indicator

Terminal Connections

0
1 B0
A0 2
3 B1
A1 4
5 B2
A2 6
7 B3
100 to A3 8
120 VAC 9 B4
A4
11 B5 10
A5
13 B6 12
A6
15 B7 14
A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

125
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

AC Input Unit C200H-IA221

Rated Input Voltage 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Operating Input Voltage 170 to 264 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance 21 kW (50 Hz), 18 kW (60 Hz)
Input Current 10 mA typical (at 200 VAC)
ON Voltage 120 VAC min.
OFF Voltage 40 VAC max.
ON Response Time 35 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 55 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 0.15 mF 820 Ω
200 to
240 VAC
Internal
680 kW Circuit
COM 910 Ω

Input indicator

Terminal Connections
0
A0
1
A1
2
A2
3
200 to A3
240 VAC 4
A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
COM
A8
NC A9

126
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

AC Input Unit C200H-IA222/IA222V

Rated Input Voltage 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Operating Input Voltage 170 to 264 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance 21 kW (50 Hz), 18 kW (60 Hz)
Input Current 10 mA typical (at 200 VAC)
ON Voltage 120 VAC min.
OFF Voltage 40 VAC max.
ON Response Time 35 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 55 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max./400 g max. (IA222V)
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 0.15 mF 680 Ω
200 to
240 VAC
Internal
680 kW Circuit
COM 910 Ω

Input indicator

Terminal Connections

0
1 B0
A0 2
3 B1
A1 4
5 B2
A2 6
7 B3
200 to A3 8
240 VAC 9 B4
A4
11 B5 10
A5
13 B6 12
A6
15 B7 14
A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

127
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

AC/DC Input Unit C200H-IM211

Rated Input Voltage 12 to 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 2 kW
Input Current 10 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 10.2 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 15 ms max. (at 12/24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 15 ms max. (at 12/24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 200 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 2 kW

1.8 Internal
0.01
kW
COM mF Circuit

12 to
24 VAC/DC

Input indicator

Terminal Connections
0
A0
1
A1
2
A2
3
A3
12 to 4
24 VAC/DC A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
COM
A8
NC A9

128
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

AC/DC Input Unit C200H-IM212

Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 3 kW
Input Current 7 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 15 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 15 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 3 kW

1.8 Internal
0.01
kW
COM mF Circuit

24 VAC/DC

Input indicator

Terminal Connections

0
1 B0
A0 2
3 B1
A1 4
5 B2
A2 6
7 B3
24 VAC/DC A3 8
9 B4
A4
11 B5 10
A5
13 B6 12
A6
15 B7 14
A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

129
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC221

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay G6B-1174P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 10 ms max.
OFF Response Time 10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

Terminal Connections
0
L A0
1
L A1
2
L A2
3
L A3
4
L A4
5
L A5
6
L A6
7
L A7
COM
A8

NC A9

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

130
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC222

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay G6B-1174P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 10 ms max.
OFF Response Time 10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L

Internal
Circuit
COM

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

Terminal Connections

0
1 B0 L
L A0 2
3 B1 L
L A1 4
5 B2 L
L A2 6
7 B3 L
L A3 8
9 B4 L
A4
L
11 B5 10 L
L A5
B6 NC
NC A6
B7 NC
NC A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

131
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC225

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay G6B-1174P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 10 ms max.
OFF Response Time 10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
Internal Current Consumption 50 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 400 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

Terminal Connections

0
1 B0 L
L A0
3 B1 2 L
L A1
5 B2 4 L
L A2
7 B3 6 L
A3
L
9 B4 8 L
A4
L
11 B5 10 L
L A5
13 B6 12 L
L A6
15 B7 14 L
L A7
B8 NC
A8
COM B9 NC

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

Note This Unit can overheat if more than 8 output points are turned ON simultaneously.

132
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC223

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (10 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay G6B-1174-P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 10 ms max.
OFF Response Time 10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 5 independent contacts
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator
OUT
L

Internal
Circuit
OUTc

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

Terminal Connections
0
L A0
c0
A1
1
L A2
c1
A3
2
L A4
250 VAC 24 VDC max. c2
(inductive load: 2 A A5
resistive load: 2 A) 3
(10 A/Unit)
L A6
c3
A7
4
L A8
c4
A9

133
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC224

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (16 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay G6B-1174-P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 10 ms max.
OFF Response Time 10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 8 independent contacts
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
OUTc

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

Terminal Connections

0
c0 B0 L
A0 1
c1 B1 L
A1 2
c2 B2 L
A2 3
c3 B3 L
A3 4
250 VAC 24 VDC max. c4 B4 L
(inductive load: 2 A A4 5
resistive load: 2 A) c5 B5 L
(16 A/Unit) A5 6
c6 B6 L
A6 7
c7 B7 L
A7
B8 NC
NC A8
B9 NC

Note There are no restrictions in the polarity when connecting a DC power supply.

134
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC222V/OC222N

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay OC222V: G6R-1 (24 VDC) w/socket
OC222N: G6RN-1-ACD (24 VDC) soldered to
board
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 15 ms max.
OFF Response Time 15 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
Internal Current Consumption 8 mA 5 VDC max. 90 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 400 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L

Internal
Circuit
COM

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

Terminal Connections

0
1 B0 L
L A0 2
3 B1 L
L A1 4
5 B2 L
L A2 6
7 B3 L
L A3 8
9 B4 L
A4
L
11 B5 10 L
L A5
B6 NC
NC A6
B7 NC
NC A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

135
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC226/OC226N

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay OC226: G6R-1 (24 VDC) w/socket
OC226N: G6RN-1-ACD (24 VDC) soldered to
board
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 15 ms max.
OFF Response Time 15 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
Internal Current Consumption 30 mA 5 VDC max. 90 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 500 g max.
Dimensions Extended B-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

Terminal Connections

0
1 B0 L
L A0
3 B1 2 L
L A1
5 B2 4 L
L A2
7 B3 6 L
A3
L
9 B4 8 L
A4
L
11 B5 10 L
L A5
13 B6 12 L
L A6
15 B7 14 L
L A7
B8 NC
A8
COM B9 NC

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

136
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC224V/OC224N

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (16 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay OC224V: G6R-1 (24 VDC) w/socket
OC224N: G6RN-1-ACD (24 VDC) soldered to
board
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 15 ms max.
OFF Response Time 15 ms max.
No. of Circuits 8 independent contacts
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 90 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 350 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
OUTc

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

Terminal Connections

0
c0 B0 L
A0 1
c1 B1 L
A1 2
c2 B2 L
A2 3
c3 B3 L
A3 4
250 VAC 24 VDC max. c4 B4 L
(inductive load: 2 A A4 5
resistive load: 2 A) c5 B5 L
(16 A/Unit) A5 6
c6 B6 L
A6 7
c7 B7 L
A7
B8 NC
NC A8
B9 NC

Note There are no restrictions in the polarity when connecting a DC power supply.

137
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Life Expectancy of Contact Output Unit

The C200H-OC221/222/223/224/225 Contact Output Unit uses OMRON’s G6B-1174P-FD-US Relay. The life of
the G6B-1174P-FD-US Relay varies with the contact current and ambient temperature. Refer to the following
graphs to calculate this value, and be sure to replace the Relays before their service life expires.
Contact Current vs. Life Expectancy Ambient Temperature vs. Life
Conditions Expectancy
Switching frequency: 1,800 times/hour max. Conditions
Ambient temperature: 23°C Switching frequency: 1,800 times/hour max.

OMRON’s H3BA 30 VDC, L/R = 40 ms

250 VAC, cosφ = 0.4
Timer (200 VAC) (electromagnetic valve)
30 VDC, L/R = 7 ms
OMRON’s MA415A (HK, MM, and MY
Contactor (200 VAC) Hinge-type Relay)
Life expectancy (x 10 4 operations)

Life expectancy (x 10 4 operations)

250 VAC, cosφ = 1 A at 250 VAC,
130 VDC, L/R = 0 2 A at 250 VAC, resistive load resistive load
2 A at 30 VDC, resistive load 1 A at 30 VDC,
resistive load

OMRON’s 1 A at 250 VAC, inductive load

MY4 Relay (cosφ = 0.4)
(200 VAC) 1 A at 30 VDC, inductive load
(L/R = 7 ms)
Electromagnetic
valve (250 VAC,
cosφ = 0.08 to
0.1) 2 A at 250 VAC, inductive
load (cosφ = 0.4)
2 A at 30 VDC, inductive
load (L/R = 7 ms)

Contact current (normal current) (A) Ambient temperature (°C)

Note 1. If the Contact Output Unit is panel-mounted, the temperature inside the panel represents the ambient
temperature.
2. The life of the Relay at an ambient temperature of 55°C is one-fifth the life of the Relay at room tempera-
ture (0° to 40°C).
Inductive Load
The life of the Relay varies with the load inductance. If any inductive load is connected to the Contact Output Unit,
use an arc killer with the Contact Output Unit using an inductive load.
Be sure to connect a diode in parallel with every DC inductive load that is connected to the Contact Output Unit.
Contact Protection Circuit
Arc killers are used with the Contact Output Unit in order to prolong the life of each Relay mounted to the Contact
Output Unit, prevent noise, and reduce the generation of carbide and nitrate deposits. Arc killers can, however,
reduce relay life if not use correctly.
Note Arc killers used with the Contact Output Unit can delay the resetting time required by each Relay mounted to
the Contact Output Unit.

138
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Arc killer circuit examples are listed in the following table.

Circuit Current Characteristic Required element
AC DC
CR method Yes Yes If the load is a relay or solenoid, there The capacitance of the capacitor must
is a time lag between the moment the be 1 to 0.5 µF per contact current of
circuit is opened and the moment the 1 A and resistance of the resistor must
Inductive load is reset. be 0.5 to 1 Ω per contact voltage of
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, 1 V. These values, however, vary with
load

Power insert the arc killer in parallel with the the load and the characteristics of the
supply load. If the supply voltage is 100 to relay. Decide these values from
200 V, insert the arc killer between the experiments, and take into
contacts. consideration that the capacitance
suppresses spark discharge when the
contacts are separated and the
resistance limits the current that flows
into the load when the circuit is closed
again.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor
must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is
an AC circuit, use a capacitor with no
polarity.
Diode method No Yes The diode connected in parallel with The reversed dielectric strength value
the load changes energy accumulated of the diode must be at least 10 times
by the coil into a current, which then as large as the circuit voltage value.
Inductive

flows into the coil so that the current The forward current of the diode must
will be converted into Joule heat by be the same as or larger than the load
load

Power the resistance of the inductive load. current.

supply
This time lag, between the moment The reversed dielectric strength value
the circuit is opened and the moment of the diode may be two to three times
the load is reset, caused by this larger than the supply voltage if the
method is longer than that caused by arc killer is applied to electronic
the CR method. circuits with low circuit voltages.
Varistor method Yes Yes The varistor method prevents the ---
imposition of high voltage between the
contacts by using the constant voltage
characteristic of the varistor. There is
Inductive

time lag between the moment the

load

Power circuit is opened and the moment the

supply load is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V,
insert the varistor in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the varistor between the
contacts.
Note Do not connect a capacitor as an arc killer in parallel with an inductive load as shown in the following dia-
gram. This arc killer is very effective for preventing spark discharge at the moment when the circuit is
opened. However when the contacts are closed, the contacts may be welded due to the current charged in
the capacitor.
DC inductive loads can be more difficult to switch than resistive loads. If appropriate arc killers are used,
however, DC inductive loads will be as easy to switch as resistive loads.
Inductive
load

Power
supply

139
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD411

Max. Switching Capacity 12 to 48 VDC 1 A (3 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply 30 mA 12 to 48 VDC min.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L

V
Output indicator
OUT
L

Internal
Circuit Fuse COM
12 to
48 VDC
Fuse blowout
detection circuit Fuse: FGMT (Fuji Terminal Industry Co., Ltd.)
5 A 125 V 5.2-dia  20

F indicator

Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.
Terminal Connections
0
L A0
1
L A1
2
L A2
3
L A3
12 to 48 VDC 4
(1 A max., 3 A/Unit)
L A4
5
L A5
6
L A6
7
L A7
COM (0 V) A8
12 to 48 VDC A9

Note Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.

140
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD211

Max. Switching Capacity 0.3 A 24 VDC +10%/–15% (2 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 160 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply 25 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L

+V
Output indicator
OUT
L

Internal 24 VDC
Circuit Fuse COM

Fuse: FGMT (Fuji Terminal Industry Co., Ltd.)

5 A 125 V 5.2-dia  20

Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.

2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections

B0 0 L
1
L A0 2
3 B1 L
L A1 4
5 B2 L
L A2 6
7 B3 L
24 VDC L A3 8
(0.3 A max., 2 A/Unit) 9 B4 L
A4
L
11 B5 10 L
L A5
B6 NC
NC A6
B7 NC
NC A7
COM (0 V) B8 NC
A8 + 24 VDC
B9

Note Be sure to supply power to B9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.

141
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD212

Max. Switching Capacity 0.3 A 24 VDC +10%/–15% (4.8 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 8 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply 35 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight 350 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before October 9, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 09X2 or earlier)
OUT
L

+V
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal 24 VDC
Circuit Fuse COM

Fuse: UL-TSC-8A-N1
(SOC Corporation)
8 A 125 V 5.2-dia  20

Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.

2. Check the fuse when there is no output.

142
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections

B0 0 L
1
L A0 2
3 B1 L
L A1 4
5 B2 L
L A2 6
7 B3 L
24 VDC L A3 8
(0.3 A max ) 9 B4 L
A4
L
11 B5 10 L
A5
L
13 B6 12 L
L A6
15 B7 14 L
L A7
B8 NC
A8 + 24 VDC
COM (0 V) B9

Note Be sure to supply power to B9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD213

Max. Switching Capacity 2.1 A 24 VDC +10%/–15% (5.2 A/Unit) NPN output
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 8 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply 30 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L

+V

Output indicator
OUT
L

Internal 24 VDC
Circuit Fuse COM

Fuse blowout
detection circuit
Fuse: UL-TSC-8A-N1
(SOC Corporation)
8 A 125 V 5.2-dia  20
F indicator

Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.

143
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
0
L A0
1
L A1
2
L A2
3
L A3
24 VDC
4
(2.1 A max., 5.2 A/Unit) L A4
5
L A5
6
L A6
7
L A7
COM (0 V) A8
24 VDC A9

Note Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD214

(Load Short-circuit Protection Provided)
Max. Switching Capacity 24 VDC +10%/–15% 0.8 A (2.4 A/Unit) surge current
2 A (source type) PNP output
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating Short-circuit protection Overcurrent protection
Thermal protection
Power for External Supply 150 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L

Output indicator
+V

Source
Driver OUT
Internal L
Circuit Reset +
button 24 VDC
COM

Alarm Output
indicator

144
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
0
L A0
1
L A1
2
L A2
3
L A3
4
24 VDC L A4
(0.8 A max., 2.4 A/Unit) 5
L A5
6
L A6
7
L A7
COM (0 V) A8
24 VDC A9

Note Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.

C200H-OD214 Short-Circuit Protection

The C200H-OD214 Output Unit is equipped with two types of short-circuit protection: overcurrent protection and
thermal protection. Any short-circuit must be eliminated immediately in order to avoid damage to the Unit.
Overcurrent Protection
When the output current reaches 2 A, the alarm output turns ON, and the alarm indicator lights. Make sure the
surge current of the load does not exceed 2 A, or the alarm may be activated.
Thermal Protection
When the junction temperature of the output transistor reaches its upper limit, the output turns OFF, the alarm
output turns ON, and the alarm indicator blinks. But the output transistor is provided with a heat sink. So in some
cases, when the output is short-circuited the thermal protection may not activate because the extra heat is dissi-
pated by the heat sink. However, the alarm indicator will still light and the alarm output will still turn ON.
How It Works
When the short-circuit protection activates, the output displays the characteristic shown below.

Output Overcurrent
Voltage limit alarm
output point

0 Output current:
2 A (minimum value)
Each pair of outputs share one alarm indicator and one alarm output bit as shown below (bits 12 through 15 cannot
be used as IR bits)
Output No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Alarm indicator No. 0 2 4 6
Alarm Output Point No. 08 09 10 11

Both the alarm indicator and alarm output bit for the short-circuited output turn ON even if only one of the outputs is
short-circuited. Both outputs should be disconnected until the short-circuit can be traced.

145
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Clearing the Alarm

When the short-circuit has been eliminated, reset the Unit by pressing the reset button. The alarm indicator will go
out, the alarm output will turn OFF, and the output will be reset.
Output indicator

Alarm indicator

Reset button (use a screwdriver

or other similar object to press it).

Programming Example
If there is a short-circuit in an output, we want the program to turn that output OFF. Assume that the Unit is mounted
at word 000. A program to turn OFF output bits 00 and 01 is shown below.
A 00008
00000

B 00008
00001

Since alarm output bit 08 covers both output bits 00 and 01, both these outputs are forced OFF as soon as output
bit 08 turns ON (bits A and B can be any other bits required in the program).

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD216

Max. Switching Capacity 0.3 A 5 to 24 VDC
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 1.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 2 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common) positive common (source
type)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Fuse Rating None
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT L
Output indicator

OUT
L

Internal 5 to 24 VDC
Circuit

COM

146
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
0
L A0
1
L A1
2
L A2
3
L A3
5 to 24 VDC 4
L A4
5
L A5
6
L A6
7
L A7
COM A8
NC A9

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD217

Max. Switching Capacity 0.3 A 5 to 24 VDC
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 1.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 2 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common) positive common (source
type)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Fuse Rating None
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L
Output indicator

OUT
L
Internal 5 to
Circuit 24 VDC

COM

147
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections

B0 0
1 L
L A0
B1 2
3 L
L A1
B2 4
5 L
L A2
5 to 24 VDC B3 6
7 L
L A3
B4 8
9 L
L A4
11 B5 10 L
L A5
B6 NC
NC A6
B7 NC
NC A7
B8 NC
COM A8
B9 NC

C200H-OD21A Transistor Output Unit (16 Points, Sourcing)

(Load Circuit Protection Provided)
Max. Switching Capacity 24 VDC +10%/–15%, 1.0 A (4 A/Unit)
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.8 V max.
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 160 mA 5 VDC max.
Load Short-circuit Protection Detection current: 1.2 A min (1.6 A typical)
Power for External Supply 35 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight 400 g max.
Alarm Output (See note 1.) No. of outputs: 1 (2 kΩ internal resistor),
Max. output current: 10 mA
Connectable Units: Only the following DC Input
Units can be connected:
C200H-ID001, ID211, ID212, IM211 (DC), IM212
(DC), ID215, ID501, MD115, MD215, MD501
Reset Input Used when alarm output turns ON. Value will
depend on the external power supply. (See note 2.)
Load Short-circuit Protection Detection current: 1.2 A min.
(1.6 A typical)
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
Short-circuit

Output
protection

indicator
circuit
Internal circuits

to

0V
2 kΩ

Note When short-circuit/overload protection is activated, all 16 outputs will be switched OFF and the ALARM
output becomes active (low level). The problem can be detected externally by connecting a DC Input Unit to

148
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

the ALARM output or by connecting an alarm output indicator. It’s not possible to connect both the Input Unit
and the indicator at the same time. Unless the external I/O power supply is connected and turned ON, the
indicator will not light even if the output contact turns ON.
Terminal Connections

+24 VDC

0V

24 VDC

Note When the ALARM output turns ON, remove the cause of the high current and then shut off the external
power supply for approx. 1 second. After confirming that the cause has been removed, turn ON the power
supply again to reset the output. As shown in the diagram, it is recommended that a relay or switch that turns
ON or OFF only the external power supply be connected right before the B9 (+V). Check that this relay or
switch has a contact capacity higher than the external power supply current consumption (35 mA + load
current minimum).

Triac Output Unit C200H-OA122-E

Max. Switching Capacity 1.2 A 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/Unit)
Max. Inrush Current 15 A (pulse width: 100 ms)
30 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
Min. Switching Capacity 100 mA 10 VAC/50 mA 24 VAC/10 mA 100 VAC
min.
Leakage Current 1.5 mA (120 VAC) max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 VAC max. (50 to 1,200 mA)/ 5 VAC max. (10 to
50 mA)
ON Response Time 1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1/2 of load frequency+1 ms or less.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions E-shape

149
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L

Output indicator OUT

L

Internal
Circuit Fuse COM

120 VAC max.

Fuse blowout
detection circuit

F indicator

Fuse: 5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20) FGMT (Fuji Terminal Industry Co., Ltd.)

Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.

Terminal Connections
L 0 A0
L 1 A1
L 2 A2
L 3 A3
120 VAC max. 4
(1.2 A max. 4 A/Unit) L A4
L 5 A5
L 6 A6
L 7 A7
COM A8
NC A9

150
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Triac Output Unit C200H-OA221

Max. Switching Capacity 1 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA (resistive load)/40 mA (inductive load) 10
VAC
Leakage Current 3 mA (100 VAC) max./6 mA (200 VAC) max.
Residual Voltage 1.2 V max.
ON Response Time 1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1/2 of load frequency or less.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 5 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L

Output indicator OUT

L

Internal
Circuit Fuse COM
250 VAC max.

Fuse blowout
detection circuit

F indicator

Fuse: 5 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) MF51SH (JIS)

Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.
Terminal Connections
0
L A0
1
L A1
2
L A2
3
L A3
250 VAC max 4
(1 A max. 4 A/Unit) L A4
5
L A5
6
L A6
7
L A7
COM A8
NC A9

151
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Triac Output Unit C200H-OA222V

Max. Switching Capacity 0.3 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (2 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA (resistive load)/40 mA (inductive load)
10 VAC
Leakage Current 3 mA (100 VAC) max./6 mA (200 VAC) max.
Residual Voltage 1.2 V max.
ON Response Time 1/2 of load frequency or less
OFF Response Time 1/2 of load frequency or less.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 200 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 3 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight 400 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L

Output indicator OUT

L

Internal
Circuit Fuse COM

250 VAC max.

Fuse: 3 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) MQ4 (SOC)

Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.

2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections

0
1 B0 L
L A0 2
3 B1 L
L A1 4
5 B2 L
L A2 6
7 B3 L
L A3 8
9 B4 L
L A4 10
11 B5 L
L A5
B6 NC
NC A6
250 VAC max. B7 NC
(0.3 A max., 2 A/Unit) NC A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

152
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Triac Output Unit C200H-OA223

Max. Switching Capacity 1.2 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/Unit)
Max. Inrush Current 15 A (pulse width: 100 ms)
30 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
Min. Switching Capacity 100 mA 10 VAC/50 mA 24 VAC/10 mA 100 VAC
min.
Leakage Current 1.5 mA (120 VAC) max./3 mA (240 VAC) max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 VAC max. (50 to 1,200 mA)/ 5 VAC max. (10 to
50 mA)
ON Response Time 1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1/2 of load frequency+1 ms or less.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 5 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions E-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L

Output indicator OUT

L

Internal
Circuit Fuse COM

250 VAC max.

Fuse blowout
detection circuit

F indicator

Fuse: 5 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) HT (SOC)

Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.

Terminal Connections
0
L A0
L 1 A1
L 2 A2
L 3 A3
250 VAC max. 4
(1.2 A max. 4 A/Unit) L A4
L 5 A5
L 6 A6
L 7 A7
COM A8
NC A9

153
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Triac Output Unit C200H-OA224

Max. Switching Capacity 0.5 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (2 A/Unit)
Max. inrush current 10 A (pulse width: 100ms)
20 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
Min. Switching Capacity 100 mA 10 VAC/50 mA 24 VAC/10 mA 100 VAC
min.
Leakage Current 1.5 mA (120 VAC) max./3 mA (240 VAC) max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 VAC max. (50 to 500 mA)/5 VAC max. (10 to
50 mA)
ON Response Time 1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1/2 of load frequency + 1 ms or less.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 270 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 3.15 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L

Output indicator OUT

L

Internal
Circuit Fuse COM

250 VAC max.

Fuse: 3.15 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) MT4 (SOC)

Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.

2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections

0
1 B0 L
L A0 2
3 B1 L
L A1 4
5 B2 L
L A2 6
7 B3 L
L A3 8
9 B4 L
L A4 10
11 B5 L
L A5
B6 NC
NC A6
250 VAC max. B7 NC
(0.5 A max., 2 A/Unit) NC A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

154
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Group-2 High-density I/O Units

In the following diagrams, “m” is the first word allocated to the Unit in PC memory.

DC Input Unit C200H-ID111 (64 Points)

Rated Input Voltage 12 VDC +10%/–15%
Operating Input Voltage 10.2 to 13.2 VDC
Input Impedance 2.7 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 12 VDC)
ON Voltage 8.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 120 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions D-shape

Circuit Configuration
COM
1000 pF
IN00 Internal
Circuit
A IN07 820 W
COM
IN08 2.7 kW
CN1
CN1 IN15 SW
COM Indicator
IN00 switch
CN2 circuit
IN07
B
COM
IN08 Input indicator
IN15
COM
IN00 1000 pF
Internal
IN07 Circuit
A
COM 820 W
IN08
2.7 kW
IN15
CN2
COM
IN00

IN07
B
COM
IN08

IN15

155
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
I/O word “m+1” I/O word “m” I/O word “m+2” I/O word “m+3”
B A A B
0 0
NC 20 20 NC 1 1
1 1
NC 19 19 NC 2 2
COM COM 2 2
18 18 3 3
15 15 12 VDC 3 3
17 17 4 4 12 VDC
14 14 4 4
16 16 5 5
12 VDC 13 13 12 VDC + 5 5 +
15 15 6 6
+ 12 12 + 6 6
14 14 7 7
11 11 7 7
13 13 8 8
10 10 COM COM
12 12 9 9
9 9 8 8
11 11 10 10
8 8 9 9
10 10 11 11
COM COM 10 10
9 9 12 12
7 7 12 VDC 11 11
8 8 13 13 12 VDC
6 6 12 12
7 7 14 14
12 VDC 5 5 12 VDC + 13 13 +
6 6 15 15
+ 4 4 + 14 14
5 5 16 16
3 3 15 15
4 4 17 17
2 2 COM COM
3 3 18 18
1 2 2 1 NC 19 19 NC
0 1 1 0 NC 20 20 NC

Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number). For the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HX/C200HW PC (0 to F Unit), the I/O word is as follows;
0 to 9 Unit: m= IR 030 + 2 × I/O number
A to F Unit: m= IR 330 + 2 × (I/O number – A)
2. The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals in
each connector. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in
each connector are connected internally.

156
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

DC Input Unit C200H-ID216 (32 Points)

Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 5.6 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (32 points/common)
All 32 points cannot be turned ON simultaneously
at high temperatures. Refer to the following graph.
Internal Current Consumption 100 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 180 g max.
Dimensions C-shape

Circuit Configuration and Simultaneously Usable Points

Input Voltage:
32 26.4 VDC
COM 30
1000 pF
IN00
25
A IN07 680 W
Simultaneously Usable Points

COM
IN08 5.6 kW 20
IN15 Input indicator
Internal
Circuit 15
COM
1000 pF
IN00 10

B IN07 680 W
COM 5
IN08 5.6 kW
Input indicator
IN15 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 60
Ambient Temperature (°C)

157
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
I/O word “m” I/O word “m+1”
A B
0 0
1 1
1 1
2 2
2 2
3 3
3 3
24 VDC 4 4 24 VDC
4 4
5 5
+ 5 5 +
6 6
6 6
7 7
7 7
8 8
COM COM
9 9
8 8
10 10
9 9
11 11
10 10
12 12
11 11
24 VDC 13 13 24 VDC
12 12
14 14
+ 13 13 +
15 15
14 14
16 16
15 15
17 17
COM COM
18 18
NC 19 19 NC

NC 20 20 NC

Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number).
2. The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals.
Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals are connected
internally.

DC Input Unit C200H-ID217 (64 Points)

Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 5.6 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (32 points/common)
All 64 points cannot be turned ON simultaneously
at high temperatures. Refer to the following graph.
Internal Current Consumption 120 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions D-shape

158
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration and Simultaneously Usable Points

COM
1000 pF
IN00 Internal
Circuit Input Voltage:
A IN07 680 W 24.0 VDC
COM
IN08 64
5.6 kW Input Voltage:
60 26.4 VDC
CN1

CN1
IN15 SW
COM Indicator
IN00 50

Simultaneously Usable Points

switch
CN2 circuit
IN07
B
COM 40
IN08 Input indicator
IN15 30
COM
IN00 1000 pF
Internal
IN07 Circuit 20
A
COM 680 W
IN08
5.6 kW 10
CN2

IN15
COM
IN00 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 60
IN07 Ambient Temperature (°C)
B
COM
IN08

IN15

Terminal Connections
I/O word “m+1”
CN1 I/O word “m” I/O word “m+2”
CN2 I/O word “m+3”
B A A B
0 0
NC 20 20 NC 1 1
1 1
NC 19 19 NC 2 2
COM COM 2 2
18 18 3 3
15 15 24 VDC 3 3
17 17 4 4 24 VDC
14 14 4 4
16 16 5 5
24 VDC 13 13 24 VDC + 5 5 +
15 15 6 6
+ 12 12 + 6 6
14 14 7 7
11 11 7 7
13 13 8 8
10 10 COM COM
12 12 9 9
9 9 8 8
11 11 10 10
8 8 9 9
10 10 11 11
COM COM 10 10
9 9 12 12
7 7 24 VDC 11 11
8 8 13 13 24 VDC
6 6 12 12
7 7 14 14
24 VDC 5 5 24 VDC + 13 13 +
6 6 15 15
+ 4 4 + 14 14
5 5 16 16
3 3 15 15
4 4 17 17
2 2 COM COM
3 3 18 18
1 2 2 1 NC 19 19 NC
0 1 1 0 NC 20 20 NC

Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number).
2. The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals in
each connector. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in
each connector are connected internally.

159
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

DC Input Unit C200H-ID218

Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Input Impedance 3.9 kΩ
Input Current 6 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage/ON Current 15.4 VDC min./3.5 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current 5.0 VDC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time 1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits 32 (32 points/common)
Note The number of points that can be ON simulta-
neously is limited according to the ambient
temperature. Refer to the following diagram
for details.
Internal Current Consumption 100 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 180 g max.

Circuit Configuration

Ambient Temperature for Simultaneously ON Points

0.01 µF
Input voltage: 24.0 VDC
to
Simultaneously ON points

470 Ω
Input voltage: 26.4 VDC
Internal circuit

3.9 kΩ
to

Input LED indicator

0.01 µF

to
470 Ω
3.9 kΩ
to
Input LED indicator
Ambient temperature

Terminal Connections
m words m + 1 words

24 VDC 24 VDC

24 VDC 24 VDC

160
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Note 1. The polarity of the input power supply can be either positive or negative. The polarity of all commons,
however, must be the same.
2. COM terminals must all be wired even though they are connected internally.

DC Input Unit C200H-ID219

Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Input Impedance 3.9 kΩ
Input Current 6 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage/ON Current 15.4 VDC min./3.5 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current 5.0 VDC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time 1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits 64 (32 points/common)
Note The number of points that can be ON simulta-
neously is limited according to the ambient
temperature. Refer to the following diagram
for details.
Internal Current Consumption 120 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.

Circuit Configuration
Internal circuit

0.01 µF
Input LED indicator
to Ambient Temperature for Simultaneously ON Points
470 Ω
3.9 kΩ
Input voltage: 20.4 VDC
to

Input voltage: 24.0 VDC

Simultaneously ON points

to

to Input voltage: 26.4 VDC

Input LED indicator
Internal circuit

0.01 µF
to

470 Ω
to 3.9 kΩ

to

to
Ambient temperature

161
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections

(m + 1) words (m + 1) words (m + 2) words (m + 3) words

24 VDC 24 VDC

24 VDC 24 VDC

24 VDC 24 VDC

24 VDC 24 VDC

Note 1. The polarity of the input power supply can be either positive or negative. The polarity of all commons for
CN1 and CN2, however, must be the same.
2. COM terminals for CN1 and CN2 must all be wired even though they are connected internally.

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD218 (32 Points)

Max. Switching Capacity 16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC (see below)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.8 V max.
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.4 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 3.5 A (The fuse is not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 110 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(3.4 mA × number of ON pts)
Weight 180 g max.
Dimensions C-shape

162
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration and Maximum Switching Capacity

Units manufactured on or before January 28, 2000
(manufacturing numbers 2810 or earlier*)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC

OUT00

OUT07
Output
indicator COM
Internal 4.5 to A
Circuit 26.4 VDC
100
OUT08

Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)

OUT15
Output COM
indicator 4.5 to
26.4 VDC
Fuse OUT00
(3.5 A)
F indicator OUT07 50
Fuse COM
4.5 to B
blowout
detec- 26.4 VDC
tion cir- OUT08
cuit
OUT15 16
COM

0
0 4.5 10 20.4 26.4
Power Supply Voltage (V)
Units manufactured between January 31, 2000 and
October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 3110 to 09X2)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC

OUT00

OUT07
Output
indicator COM
Internal 4.5 to A
Circuit 26.4 VDC

OUT08

OUT15
Output COM
indicator 4.5 to 26.4
VDC
Fuse OUT00
(3.5 A)
F indicator OUT07
Fuse COM
4.5 to B
blowout
detec- 26.4 VDC
tion cir- OUT08
cuit
OUT15
COM

163
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

*Manufacturing Numbers
jjY9j
Manufacturing plant code (A to Z or blank)
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999→9, 2000→0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31

164
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
I/O word “m” I/O word “m+1”
A B
0 0
L 1 1 L
1 1
L 2 2 L
2 2
L 3 3 L
3 3
L 4 4 L 4.5 to
+ 4 4 + 26.4 VDC
L 5 5 L
5 5
L 6 6 L
6 6
L 7 7 L
7 7
L 8 8 L
COM COM
9 9
10 10
8 8
L 11 11 L
9 9
L 12 12 L
10 10
L 13 13 L
11 11
L 14 14 L
+ 12 12 +
L 15 15 L
13 13
L 16 16 L
14 14
L 17 17 L
15 15
L 18 18 L
COM COM
19 19
20 20

Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number).
2. When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and the error flag in AR 02 corresponding to the I/O number is
turned ON. I/O numbers 0 to 9 correspond to AR 0205 to AR 0214. For the C200HX/C200HG/C200HX/
C200HW PC (0 to F Unit), the following AR and IR bits turn ON;
0 to 9 Unit: AR 0205 to AR 0214 and IR 28000 to IR 28009 turn ON.
A to F Unit: IR 28010 to IR 28015 turn ON.
3. The interruption of power from the external power supply is treated the same as a fuse blowout.
4. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals are connected
internally.
5. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring
with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.

165
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD219 (64 Points)

Max. Switching Capacity 16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC (see below)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.8 V max.
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.4 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 270 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses Two 3.5 A fuses (1 fuse/common)
The fuses are not user-replacable.
Power for External Supply 220 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(3.4 mA × number of ON pts)
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions D-shape

166
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before January 28, 2000
(manufacturing numbers 2810 or earlier*)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
Inter-
OUT07
nal
Circuit COM
CN1
Fuse 4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
SW CN1 OUT15
Indicator COM
switch/ Output indicator CN2
fuse
blowout F indicator
detection
circuit
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
Inter-
OUT07
nal
Circuit COM
CN2
Fuse 4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08

OUT15
COM

Units manufactured between January 29, 2000 and

October 10, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 3110 to 10X2)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
Inter-
OUT07
nal
Circuit COM
CN1
Fuse 4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08
SW CN1 OUT15
Indicator COM
switch/ Output indicator CN2
fuse
blowout F indicator
detection
circuit
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00
Inter-
OUT07
nal
Circuit COM
CN2
Fuse 4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08

OUT15
COM

167
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

*Manufacturing Numbers
jjY9j
Manufacturing plant code (A to Z or blank)
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999→9, 2000→0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31
Maximum Switching Capacity
6.4
6.0
Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)

Max. Switching Capacity (A/unit)

100
5.0

4.0

50 3.0

2.0

16 1.0

0 0
0 4.5 10 20.4 26.4 0 10 20 30 40 505560
Power Supply Voltage (V) Ambient Temperature (°C)

168
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
I/O word “m+1” I/O word “m” I/O word “m+2” I/O word “m+3”
B A A B
0 0
20 20 L 1 1 L
COM COM 1 1
19 19 L 2 2 L
15 15 2 2
L 18 18 L L 3 3 L
14 14 3 3
L 17 17 L L 4 4 L 4.5 to
13 13 + 4 4 + 26.4 VDC
L 16 16 L L 5 5 L
12 12 5 5
+ L 15 15 L + L 6 6 L
11 11 6 6
L 14 14 L L 7 7 L
10 10 7 7
L 13 13 L L 8 8 L
9 9 COM COM
L 12 12 L 9 9
8 8
L 11 11 L 10 10
8 8
10 10 L 11 11 L
COM COM 9 9
9 9 L 12 12 L
7 7 10 10
L 8 8 L L 13 13 L
6 6 11 11
L 7 7 L L 14 14 L
5 5 + 12 12 +
L 6 6 L L 15 15 L
4 4 13 13
+ L 5 5 L + L 16 16 L
3 3 14 14
L 4 4 L L 17 17 L
2 2 15 15
L 3 3 L L 18 18 L
1 1 COM COM
L 2 2 L 19 19
0 0
L 1 1 L 20 20

Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number).
2. When either fuse blows, the F indicator lights and the error flag in AR 02 corresponding to the I/O number
is turned ON. I/O numbers 0 to 9 correspond to AR 0205 to AR 0214.
3. The interruption of power from the external power supply is treated the same as a fuse blowout.
4. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in each connector
are connected internally.
5. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring
with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.

169
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD21B (32 Points)

(Load Short-circuit Protection Provided)
Max. Switching Current 0.5 A 24 VDC +10%/–15% (5 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Current None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.8 V max.
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 32 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses One 7 A fuse (1 fuse/common)
The fuses are not user-replacable.
Power for External Supply 160 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
(5 mA × number of ON pts)
Weight 180 g max.
Alarm Indicator Lamp F lights (unless fuse is broken).
Load Short-circuit Prevention Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
(see note 1) Automatic restart after error clearance.
Dimensions C-shape

Note When the short-circuit/overload protection is activated for a contact point, the output for that point is turned
OFF. At the same time, lamp “F” lights up, and the alarm from AR0205 to AR0214 corresponding to the I/O
number turns ON. After the cause of the error has been removed, the alarm will be cleared automatically
when the internal temperature of the element drops.
Circuit Configuration
Short-circuit
protection
circuit

to

Output LED 0V
Internal circuit

indicator

to

Alarm
LED 0V
indi-
cator
Short-circuit
protection
circuit

to
0V
Output LED
indicator
to

0V

170
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
I/O word “m” I/O word “m+1”

24 VDC 24 VDC

24 VDC 24 VDC

High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)

TTL Input Unit C200H-ID501 (32 Points)
Rated Input Voltage 5 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 4.5 to 5.5 VDC
Input Impedance 1.1 kW
Input Current 3.5 mA (at 5 VDC)
ON Voltage 3.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 1.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
OFF Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
No. of Circuits 4 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs 8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
Internal Current Consumption 130 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)
Circuit Configuration
COM0

IN00 2.4 kW
CN1 IN07
COM1
IN08 1.1 kW

IN15
Internal
Circuit
COM2

IN00 2.4 kW
CN2 IN07
COM3
IN08 1.1 kW

IN15

171
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
I/O word “n” I/O word “n+1”
B A A B
NC 12 12 NC
0 8
1 1
NC 11 11 NC
1 9
2 2
NC 10 10 NC
2 10
3 3
COM1
9 9 COM0
5 VDC 3 11 5 VDC
4 4
15 8 8 7 + 4 12 +
5 5
14 7 7 6 + 5 13 +
6 6
5 VDC 13 6 6 5 5 VDC 6 14
7 7
+ 12 4 +
5 5 7 15
8 8
+ 11 4 4 3 + COM2 COM3
9 9
10 3 3 2
NC 10 10 NC
9 2 2 1
NC 11 11 NC
8 1 1 0
NC 12 12 NC

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number). For the C200HX/
C200HG/C200HX/C200HW PC (0 to F Unit), the I/O word is as follows.
0 to 9 Unit: n= IR 100 + 10 × unit number
A to F Unit: n= IR 400 + 10 × (unit number – A)
2. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.

172
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

DC Input Unit C200H-ID215 (32 Points)

Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 5.6 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable; at 24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable; at 24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 4 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs 8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
Internal Current Consumption 130 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

Circuit Configuration
COM0
1000 pF
IN00

CN1 IN07 620 W

COM1
IN08 5.6 kW

IN15
Internal
Circuit
COM2
1000 pF
IN00

CN2 IN07 620 W

COM3
IN08 5.6 kW

IN15

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
I/O word “n” I/O word “n+1”
B A A B
NC 12 12 NC
0 8
1 1
NC 11 11 NC
1 9
2 2
NC 10 10 NC
2 10
3 3
COM1
9 9 COM0
24 VDC 3 11 24 VDC
4 4
15 8 8 7 + 4 12 +
5 5
14 7 7 6 + 5 13 +
6 6
24 VDC 13 6 6 5 24 VDC 6 14
7 7
+ 12 4 +
5 5 7 15
8 8
+ 11 4 4 3 + COM2 COM3
9 9
10 3 3 2
NC 10 10 NC
9 2 2 1
NC 11 11 NC
8 1 1 0
NC 12 12 NC

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
3. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to the
graphs on the following page for details.

173
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Usable I/O Points (C200H-ID215)

To prevent overheating in the C200H-ID215 that can cause early failure of internal components, limit the number of
input points that are ON simultaneously. As shown below, the number of points that can be on simultaneously
depends on both the temperature and the input voltage.
For example, 22 pts with input voltage of 24.0 VDC can be ON at 55°C, but only 16 pts with input voltage of
26.4 VDC can be ON at 55°C. At 24.0 VDC, all 32 input pts can be ON up to 43°C, but at 26.4 VDC all 32 input pts
can be ON up to 34°C.
Input Voltage: 26.4 VDC
32
30 Input Voltage: 24.0 VDC
Input Voltage:
24.0 VDC; 55°C,
22 points ON

22
20
Simultaneously Usable Inputs

16
Input Voltage:
24.0 VDC; 55°C,
10 16 points ON

Input Voltage: Input Voltage:

24.0 VDC; 34°C, 24.0 VDC; 43°C,
32 points ON 32 points ON

0
0 10 20 3034 4043 50 55 60
Ambient Temperature (°C)

Note If the Unit is at room temperature it takes about 10 minutes for excessive heat to build up when all inputs are
turned ON, so all inputs can be turned ON simultaneously for testing.

174
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

TTL Output Unit C200H-OD501 (Used as a 32-point Output Unit)

Max. Switching Capacity 5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 1.12 A/Unit;
output resistance 4.7 kW)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 4 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses 4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 39 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

175
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 13, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 13Y2 or earlier)

5 VDC

4.7 kW

OUT00

OUT07
CN1
COM0
Fuse
5 VDC
OUT08

OUT15
Internal COM1
Circuit 5 VDC

4.7 kW

OUT00

OUT07
CN2
COM2
Fuse
5 VDC
OUT08

OUT15
COM3

176
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
I/O word “n” I/O word “n+1”
A B
B A 0 8
12 12 L 1 1 L
NC NC
1 9
11 11 L 2 2 L
NC NC
+5 VDC +5 VDC 2 10
10 10 L 3 3 L

5 VDC 3 11
COM1 COM0 L 4 4 L 5 VDC
9 9
15 7 + L
4
5 5
12
L
+
L 8 8 L
5 13
14 7 7 6 5 VDC L 6 6 L
L L
6 14
5 VDC 13 6 6 5 L 7 7 L
L L
7 15
12 5 5 4 L 8 8 L
+ L L + COM2 COM3
11 4 4 3 9 9
L L +5 VDC +5 VDC
10 3 3 2 10 10
L L
9 2 2 1 NC 11 11 NC
L L
8 1 1 0 NC 12 12 NC
L L

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 32 static output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. The outputs are negative logic outputs; when there is an output, the terminal has an “L” voltage level.
Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.

TTL Output Unit C200H-OD501 (Used as 128-point Dynamic Output Unit)

Max. Switching Capacity 5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 1.12 A/Unit;
output resistance 4.7 kW)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses 4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 39 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

177
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration

Units manufactured on or before November 13, 2002

(manufacturing numbers 13Y2 or earlier)
5 VDC

4.7 kW

DATA00

DATA07

COM0
Fuse CN1
5 VDC

4.7 kW

Internal STB00
Circuit
STB07

COM1
Fuse 5 VDC
DATA08

DATA15
COM2
CN2
5 VDC
STB08

STB15
COM3

178
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections

CN1
B A
NC 12 12 NC

NC 11 11 NC
CN2
+V1 10 10 +V0 + 5 VDC
COM1 COM0
A B
9 9 DATA8 STB8
STB7 DATA7 Output device Strobe 1 1
8 8 input DATA9 STB9
(such as a nu-
STB6 DATA6 meric display) 2 2
7 7 DATA10 STB10
STB5 DATA5 3 3
6 6 DATA11 STB11
STB4 DATA4 Data 4 4
5 5 Data input DATA12 STB12
STB3 DATA3 input 5 5
4 4 DATA13 STB13
STB2 DATA2 6 6
3 3 DATA14 STB14
Output device 7 7
STB1 2 2 DATA1 Strobe
(such as a nu-
input
meric display)
DATA15 STB15
STB0 DATA0 8 8
1 1 COM2 COM3
+ 9 9
+V2 +V3
10 10
5 VDC
NC 11 11 NC

NC 12 12 NC

Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Set pin 5 of the Unit’s DIP switch ON for positive logic outputs, or OFF for negative logic outputs. When
set for negative logic outputs, the terminal has an “L” voltage level when there is an output. When set for
positive logic outputs, the terminal has an “H” voltage level when there is an output.
4. The strobe signal has negative logic regardless of the setting of pin 5.
5. Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD215 (Used as 32-point Output Unit)

Max. Switching Capacity 16 mA, 4.5 VDC to 100 mA, 26.4 VDC
800 mA/common, 3.2 A/Unit
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.7 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.6 ms max.
No. of Circuits 4 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses 4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 90 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

179
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 29, 1999 Units manufactured between November 30, 1999 and
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier*) October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 30Y9 to 09X2)

5 to 5 to
24 VDC 24 VDC

OUT00 OUT00
OUT07 OUT07
10 kΩ CN1 6.8 kΩ CN1
COM0 COM0
Fuse 5 to Fuse 5 to
8.2 kΩ 24 VDC 15 kΩ 24 VDC
Inter- Inter- OUT08
nal OUT08 nal
Cir- OUT15 Cir- OUT15
cuit COM1 cuit COM1
5 to 5 to
24 VDC 24 VDC

OUT00 OUT00
OUT07 OUT07
10 kΩ CN2 6.8 kΩ CN2
COM2 COM2
Fuse 5 to Fuse 5 to
8.2 kΩ 15 kΩ
24 VDC 24 VDC
OUT08 OUT08
OUT15 OUT15
COM3 COM3

*Manufacturing Numbers
jjY9j
Manufacturing plant code (A to Z or blank)
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999→9, 2000→0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31

180
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
I/O word “n” I/O word “n+1”
A B
B A 0 8
12 12 L 1 1 L
NC NC
1 9
11 11 L 2 2 L
NC NC
+5 to 24 VDC +5 to 24 VDC 2 10
10 10 L 3 3 L

5 to 24 3 11
COM1 COM0 L 4 4 L 5 to 24
9 9 VDC
15 7 + L
4
5 5
12
L
+VDC
L 8 8 L
5 13
14 7 7 6 5 to 24 L 6 6 L
L L
VDC 6 14
5 to 24 13 6 6 5 L 7 7 L
L L
VDC 7 15
12 5 5 4 L 8 8 L
+ L L + COM2 COM3
11 4 4 3 9 9
L L +5 to 24 VDC +5 to 24 VDC
10 3 3 2 10 10
L L
9 2 2 1 NC 11 11 NC
L L
8 1 1 0 NC 12 12 NC
L L

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 32 static output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring
with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD215

(Used as 128-point Dynamic Output Unit)
Max. Switching Capacity 16 mA, 4.5 VDC to 100 mA, 26.4 VDC
800 mA/common, 3.2 A/Unit
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.7 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.6 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses 4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 90 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

181
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 29, 1999 Units manufactured between November 30, 1999 and
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier*) October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 30Y9 to 09X2)
5 to 5 to
24 VDC 24 VDC

DATA00 DATA00
DATA07 DATA07
10 kΩ 6.8 kΩ
COM0 COM0
8.2 kΩ Fuse CN1 15 kΩ Fuse CN1
5 to 5 to
Inter- 24 VDC Inter- 24 VDC
nal nal
Cir- Cir-
STB00 STB00
cuit cuit
STB07 STB07
10 kΩ 6.8 kΩ
COM1 COM1
Fuse 5 to Fuse 5 to
8.2 kΩ 15 kΩ
24 VDC 24 VDC
DATA08 DATA08
DATA15 DATA15
COM2 CN2 COM2 CN2
5 to 5 to
24 VDC 24 VDC
STB08 STB08
STB15 STB15
COM3 COM3

*Manufacturing Numbers
jjY9j
Manufacturing plant code (A to Z or blank)
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999→9, 2000→0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31

182
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections

CN1
B A
NC 12 12 NC

NC 11 11 NC
CN2
5 to 24 VDC
+V1 10 10 +V0 +
COM1 COM0
B A
9 9 DATA8 STB8
STB7 DATA7 Output device Strobe 1 1
8 8 input DATA9 STB9
(such as a nu-
STB6 DATA6 meric display) 2 2
7 7 DATA10 STB10
STB5 DATA5 3 3
6 6 DATA11 STB11
STB4 DATA4 Data 4 4
5 5 Data input DATA12 STB12
STB3 DATA3 input 5 5
4 4 DATA13 STB13
STB2 DATA2 6 6
3 3 DATA14 STB14
Output device 7 7
STB1 2 2 DATA1 Strobe
(such as a nu-
input
meric display)
DATA15 STB15
STB0 DATA0 8 8
1 1 COM2 COM3
+ 9 9
+V2 +V3
10 10
5 to 24 VDC
NC 11 11 NC

NC 12 12 NC

Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Set pin 5 of the Unit’s DIP switch ON for positive logic outputs, or OFF for negative logic outputs. When
set for negative logic outputs, the terminal has an “L” voltage level when there is an output. When set for
positive logic outputs, the terminal has an “H” voltage level when there is an output.
4. The strobe signal has negative logic regardless of the setting of pin 5.
5. When the output device (such as a numeric display) does not have a pull-up resistor, it is necessary to
add a pull-up resistor between the + terminal of the power supply and each data (0 to 15) and strobe (0 to
15) terminal.
6. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring
with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.

183
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

High-density I/O Unit Limitations

Limitations on the switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units and the usable
number of I/O points in the C200H-ID215 and C200H-MD215 are shown below.

Switching Capacity
The switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units depends on the power supply
voltage, as shown below.

100

Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)

50

16

0
0 4.5 10 20.4 26.4
Power Supply Voltage (V)

TTL I/O Unit C200H-MD501

(Used as I/O Unit with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs)
Output Specifications Max. Switching Capacity 5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 560 mA/Unit;
(Connector 1) output resistance 4.7 kW)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (8 points/common)
Fuses 2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 20 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)

Input Specifications Rated Input Voltage 5 VDC

(Connector 2)
Operating Input Voltage 4.5 to 5.5 VDC
Input Impedance 1.1 kW
Input Current 3.5 mA (at 5 VDC)
ON Voltage 3.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 1.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
OFF Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
No. of Circuits 2 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs 8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)

General Specifications Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.

Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

184
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 21, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 21Y2 or earlier)
5 VDC

4.7 kW

OUT00

OUT07
CN1 (Output)
COM0
Fuse
5 VDC
Internal OUT08
Circuit
OUT15
1.1 kW COM1
IN00

IN07
2.4 kW
COM2 CN2 (Input)
IN08

IN15
COM3

185
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
I/O word “n” I/O word “n+1”
B A A B
0 8
NC 12 12 NC 1 1
1 9
NC 11 11 NC 2 2
+5 VDC +5 VDC 2 10
10 10 3 3
COM1 COM0 5 VDC 3 11 5 VDC
9 9 4 4
15 7 + 4 12 +
L 8 8 L 5 5
14 6 5 VDC + 5 13 +
L 7 7 L 6 6
5 VDC 13 5 6 14
L 6 6 L 7 7
12 4 7 15
+ L 5 5 L + 8 8
11 3 COM2 COM3
L 4 4 L 9 9
10 3 3 2 NC 10 10 NC
L L
9 2 2 1 NC 11 11 NC
L L
8 1 1 0 NC 12 12 NC
L L

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
4. The outputs are negative logic outputs; when there is an output, the terminal has an “L” voltage level.
Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.
5. The user is not authorized to change the fuse.

TTL I/O Unit C200H-MD501 (Used as 128-point Dynamic Input Unit)

Output Specifications Max. Switching Capacity 5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 560 mA/Unit;
(Connector 1) output resistance 4.7 kW)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
Fuses 2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 20 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)

Input Specifications Rated Input Voltage 5 VDC

(Connector 2)
Operating Input Voltage 4.5 to 5.5 VDC
Input Impedance 1.1 kW
Input Current 3.5 mA (at 5 VDC)
ON Voltage 3.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 1.0 VDC max.

General Specifications No. of Circuits 2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)

Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

186
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 21, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 21Y2 or eariler)
5 VDC

4.7 kW

STB00

STB07
CN1
COM0
Fuse
5 VDC
Internal STB08
Circuit
STB15
1.1 kW COM1
DATA00

DATA07
2.4 kW
COM2 CN2
DATA08

DATA15
COM3

187
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
B A A B
12 12 DATA0 DATA8
NC NC 1 1
11 11 DATA1 DATA9
NC NC 2 2
5 VDC +V1 +V0 5 VDC DATA2 DATA10
10 10 3 3
+ COM1
9 9 COM0 + DATA3 DATA11
4 4
STB15 8 STB7 Keyboard, thumb- DATA4 DATA12
8 wheel switch, etc. 5 5
STB14 7 7 STB6 DATA5 DATA13
6 6
STB13 6 6 STB5 DATA6 DATA14
7 7
STB12 5 5 STB4 DATA7 DATA15
8 8
STB11 4 4 STB3 COM2 COM3
9 9
STB10 3 3 STB2
NC 10 10 NC
STB9 2 2 STB1
NC 11 11 NC
STB8 1 1 STB0
NC 12 12 NC

Keyboard, thumb-
wheel switch, etc.

Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.

12 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD115

(Used as I/O Unit with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs)
Output Specifications Max. Switching Capacity 16 mA, 4.5 VDC to 100 mA, 26.4 VDC
(Connector 1) 800 mA/common, 1.6 A/Unit
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.7 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.6 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (8 points/common)
Fuses 2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 45 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)

Input Specifications Rated Input Voltage 12 VDC +10%/–15%

(Connector 2)
Operating Input Voltage 10.2 to 13.2 VDC
Input Impedance 2.7 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 12 VDC)
ON Voltage 8.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
OFF Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
No. of Circuits 2 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs 8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)

188
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

General Specifications Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.

Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 17, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 17Y2 or eariler)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
4.7 kW

OUT00

OUT07
CN1
COM0
Fuse 4.5 to
26.4 VDC
Internal OUT08
Circuit
OUT15
2.7 kW COM1
IN00

IN07
620 W 1000 pF
COM2 CN2
IN08

IN15
COM3

189
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
I/O word “n” I/O word “n+1”
B A A B
0 8
NC 12 12 NC 1 1
1 9
NC 11 11 NC 2 2
+5 to 24 VDC +5 to 24 VDC 2 10
10 10 3 3
COM1 COM0 12 VDC 3 11 12 VDC
9 9 4 4
15 7 + 4 12 +
L 8 8 L 5 5
14 6 5 to 24 + 5 13 +
L 7 7 L 6 6
13 5 VDC 6 14
5 to 24 6 6 7 7
L L
VDC
12 4 7 15
+ L 5 5 L + 8 8
11 3 COM2 COM3
L 4 4 L 9 9
10 3 3 2 NC 10 10 NC
L L
9 2 2 1 NC 11 11 NC
L L
8 1 1 0 NC 12 12 NC
L L

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.

12 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD115

(Used as 128-point Dynamic Input Unit)
Output Specifications Max. Switching Capacity 50 mA 12 VDC, 400 mA/common, 0.8 A/Unit
(Connector 1)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.7 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.6 ms max.
Fuses 2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 45 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)

Input Specifications Rated Input Voltage 12 VDC

(Connector 2)
Operating Input Voltage 10.2 to 13.2 VDC
Input Impedance 2.7 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 12 VDC)
ON Voltage 8.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 3.0 VDC max.

General Specifications No. of Circuits 2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)

Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

190
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 17, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 17Y2 or earlier)
12 VDC

STB00

STB07
CN1
COM0
Fuse
12 VDC
Internal STB08
Circuit
STB15
2.7 kW COM1
DATA00

DATA07
620 W 1000 pF
COM2 CN2
DATA08

DATA15
COM3

191
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
B A A B
12 12 DATA0 DATA8
NC NC 1 1
11 11 DATA1 DATA9
NC NC 2 2
12 VDC +V1 +V0 12 VDC DATA2 DATA10
10 10 3 3
+ COM1
9 9 COM0 + DATA3 DATA11
4 4
STB15 8 STB7 Keyboard, thumb- DATA4 DATA12
8 wheel switch, etc. 5 5
STB14 7 7 STB6 DATA5 DATA13
6 6
STB13 6 6 STB5 DATA6 DATA14
7 7
STB12 5 5 STB4 DATA7 DATA15
8 8
STB11 4 4 STB3 COM2 COM3
9 9
STB10 3 3 STB2
NC 10 10 NC
STB9 2 2 STB1
NC 11 11 NC
STB8 1 1 STB0
NC 12 12 NC

Keyboard, thumb-
wheel switch, etc.

Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.

24 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD215

(Used as I/O Unit with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs)
Output Specifications Max. Switching Capacity 16 mA, 4.5 VDC to 100 mA, 26.4 VDC
(Connector 1) 800 mA/common, 1.6 A/Unit
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.7 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.6 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (8 points/common)
Fuses 2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 45 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
Input Specifications Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC
(Connector 2)
Operating Input Voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 5.6 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
OFF Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
No. of Circuits 2 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs 8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
General Specifications Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

192
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 29, 1999 Units manufactured between November 30, 1999 and
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier*) October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 30Y9 to 09X2)

5 to 5 to
24 VDC 24 VDC

OUT00 OUT00

OUT07 OUT07
10 kΩ CN1 6.8 kΩ CN1
COM0 COM0
8.2 kΩ Fuse 5 to 15 kΩ Fuse 5 to
24 VDC 24 VDC
Internal OUT08 Internal OUT08
Circuit Circuit
OUT15 OUT15
5.6 kW COM1 5.6 kW COM1
IN00 IN00

IN07 IN07
620 W 1,000 pF 620 W 1,000 pF
COM2 CN2 COM2 CN2
IN08 IN08

IN15 IN15
COM3 COM3

*Manufacturing Numbers
jjY9j
Manufacturing plant code (A to Z or blank)
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999→9, 2000→0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31

193
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
I/O word “n” I/O word “n+1”
B A A B
0 8
NC 12 12 NC 1 1
1 9
NC 11 11 NC 2 2
+5 to 24 VDC +5 to 24 VDC 2 10
10 10 3 3
COM1 COM0 24 VDC 3 11 24 VDC
9 9 4 4
15 7 + 4 12 +
L 8 8 L 5 5
14 6 5 to 24 + 5 13 +
L 7 7 L 6 6
13 5 VDC 6 14
5 to 24 6 6 7 7
L L
VDC
12 4 7 15
+ L 5 5 L + 8 8
11 3 COM2 COM3
L 4 4 L 9 9
10 3 3 2 NC 10 10 NC
L L
9 2 2 1 NC 11 11 NC
L L
8 1 1 0 NC 12 12 NC
L L

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to the
graph on page 197 for details.
4. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
5. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring
with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.

24 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD215

(Used as 128-point Dynamic Input Unit)
Output Specifications Max. Switching Capacity 100 mA 24 VDC, 800 mA/common, 1.6 A/Unit
(Connector 1)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.7 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.6 ms max.
Fuses 2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 45 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)

Input Specifications Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC

(Connector 2)
Operating Input Voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 5.6 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 5.0 VDC max.

General Specifications No. of Circuits 2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)

Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

194
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 29, 1999 Units manufactured between November 30, 1999 and
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier*) October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 30Y9 to 09X2)
24 VDC 24 VDC

STB00 STB00

STB07 STB07
10 kΩ CN1 6.8 kΩ CN1
COM0 COM0
8.2 kΩ Fuse 15 kΩ Fuse
24 VDC 24 VDC
Internal STB08 Internal STB08
Circuit Circuit
STB15 STB15
5.6 kW COM1 5.6 kW COM1
DATA00 DATA00

DATA07 DATA07
620 W 1,000 pF 620 W 1,000 pF
COM2 CN2 COM2 CN2
DATA08 DATA08

DATA15 DATA15
COM3 COM3

*Manufacturing Numbers
jjY9j
Manufacturing plant code (A to Z or blank)
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999→9, 2000→0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31

195
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
B A A B
12 12 DATA0 DATA8
NC NC 1 1
11 11 DATA1 DATA9
NC NC 2 2
12 VDC +V1 +V0 12 VDC DATA2 DATA10
10 10 3 3
+ COM1
9 9 COM0 + DATA3 DATA11
4 4
STB15 8 8 STB7 Keyboard, DATA4 DATA12
thumbwheel 5 5
STB14 7 7 STB6 DATA5 DATA13
switch, etc. 6 6
STB13 6 6 STB5 DATA6 DATA14
7 7
STB12 5 5 STB4 DATA7 DATA15
8 8
STB11 4 4 STB3 COM2 COM3
9 9
STB10 3 3 STB2
NC 10 10 NC
STB9 2 2 STB1
NC 11 11 NC
STB8 1 1 STB0
NC 12 12 NC

Keyboard,
thumbwheel
switch, etc.

Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.
4. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to the
graph on the next page for details.
5. The user is not authorized to change the fuse.
6. When wiring output circuits, be sure to use the correct polarity for the external power supplies. Wiring
with incorrect polarity may result in erroneous operation of the load.

196
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

High-density I/O Unit Limitations

Limitations on the switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units and the usable
number of I/O points in the C200H-ID215 and C200H-MD215 are shown below.

Switching Capacity
The switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units depends on the power supply
voltage, as shown below.

100
Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)

50

16

0
0 4.5 10 20.4 26.4
Power Supply Voltage (V)

Usable I/O Points (C200H-MD215)

To prevent overheating in the C200H-MD215 and prevent early failure of internal components, limit the number of
input points ON simultaneously. The number of points that can be on simultaneously depends on both the temper-
ature and the input voltage. (There is no limit to the number of output points that can be ON simultaneously.)

16 Input Voltage: 26.4 VDC

15
Input Voltage: Input Voltage: 24.0 VDC
26.4 VDC; 55°,
11 points ON

11
10
Simultaneously Usable Inputs

Input Voltage:
26.4 VDC; 43°,
16 points ON
0
0 10 20 3034 4043 50 55 60
Ambient Temperature (°C)

Note If the Unit is at room temperature it takes about 10 minutes for excessive heat to build up when all inputs are
turned ON, so all inputs can be turned ON simultaneously for testing.

197
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit

The Interrupt Input Unit temporarily interrupts the main program by means of in-
puts, and executes interrupt subroutines. It must be mounted to a
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE CPU Rack, and a maximum of two Interrupt Input
Units can be mounted on the Rack. (It is possible to mount it to an Expansion I/O
Rack, but in that case it will be treated as a Standard Input Unit and will have no
interrupt functions.) Use a C200HW-BCjj1 Backplane. The word number of
the slot position to which the Unit is mounted is allocated as eight input points.

Operation display area:

Displays the ON/OFF status of interrupts.

Terminal block:
Consists of removable components.

Rated Input Voltage 12 to 24 VDC +10%/–15%

Input Impedance 2 KΩ
Input Current 10 mA typical (24 VDC)
ON Voltage 10.2 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.5 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 20 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight 200 g max.

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 2 kW

0.01 1.8 Internal

mF kW Circuit
COM

12 to 24 VDC

Input indicator

Either plus or minus can be used for the input power supply.

198
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
0
A0
1
A1
2
A2
3
A3
12 to 24 VDC 4
A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
COM
A8
NC A9

199
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Analog Timer Unit C200H-TM001

Item Specifications
Oscillation Method CR oscillation
Time Setting Range Use the DIP switch to set any of the following four ranges, according to the chart shown on
the next page.
0.1 to 1 second (typical)
1 to 10 seconds (typical)
10 to 60 seconds (typical)
1 to 10 minutes (typical)
Timer Pause Function The timing operation can be paused if so specified by the program. Therefore, the timers can
also be used as cumulative registers.
Number of Timer Points 4
Indicators SET and TIME UP
External Variable External variable resistors can be used to set the time value when the IN/EXT selector is set
Resistor to OFF (EXT). Use 20 kW variable resistors.
Bit Allocation Bit Function The word is determined by the system configuration.

00 T0 start output
01 T1 start output
“1” when time is running
02 T2 start output
03 T3 start output
04 T0 pause output
05 T1 pause output 0 Operates
06 T2 pause output 1 Stops
07 T3 pause output
08 T0 time-up input
09 T1 time-up input
“1” when time is up
10 T2 time-up input
11 T3 time-up input
12
13
Cannot be used
14
15

Programming and Timer start input Timer start

Timing Chart Timer setting input
(word n bits 00
word n bits 08 through 11 through 03)
Time-up output Time-up
output
Time-up flag
Timer set value
Internal Current 60 mA 5 VDC max.
Consumption

200
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Internal variable
resistors TM001 Indicators
These variable re- The SET indicators in the top row light when the cor-
sistors are used to responding timer is operating. The TIME UP indica-
set the timers. The tors in the bottom row light when the corresponding
settings of these re- timer (T0 through T3) turns ON.
sistors are effective
only when the cor- 1
0
responding IN/EXT Time range setting
selector is ON. To
set or adjust the
time, use the 2 3
screwdriver
supplied with the
Unit. Turn the vari-
able resistor clock-
wise to increase the
time value. The
numbers 0 through
3 correspond to T0
through T3, respec-
tively.

Min.

1
External variable resistor connectors
2 External variable resistors can also be used to set the
Max. timers. The IN/EXT selector pin must be set to the
OFF position. Numbers 0 through 3 correspond to T0
3 through T3, respectively. Use 20-kW variable resistors
and AWG 22 to 28 lead wires. The connector has sol-
derless terminals and must be wired as shown below.

IN/EXT selectors
When the internal variable resistor is used, set the corre-
sponding pin to ON; when an external variable resistor is
used, set the corresponding pin to OFF. Pin numbers 4
through 1 correspond to T0 through T3, respectively.

Timers Pin 0.1 to 1 s 0.1 to 10 s 10 to 60 s 1 to 10 m

T0 8 0 1 0 1
7 0 0 1 1
T1 6 0 1 0 1
5 0 0 1 1
T2 4 0 1 0 1
3 0 0 1 1
T3 2 0 1 0 1
1 0 0 1 1
(0: OFF 1: ON)
Use the following Connector.
Name Model Manufacturer
Connector IL-2S-S3L(N) Japan
p Aviation Electronics
Contacts IL-C2-1-10000 I d
Industry, Ltd.
Ld

Note 1. Use lead wires that are AWG28 to AWG22.

2. Crimp contact wiring is used.

201
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Wire as shown below.

Analog Timer
Unit Timer

External variable
resistor connector

External variable
resistor

! Caution Ensure that the external variable resistor connectors are open when using the internal variable
resistor.

Standard B7A Interface Unit C200H-B7AI1/B7AO1

The Standard B7A Interface Unit used with the B7A Link Terminal allows the transmission and reception of
16-point I/O data over two wires.

The following Standard B7A Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal models are available.

B7A Interface Unit B7A Link Terminals

16-point input: C200H-B7AI1 B7A-T6j1 (Screw terminal models)
B7A-T6D2 (Modular models)
16-point output: C200H-B7AO1 B7A-R6jj1 (Screw terminal models)
B7A-R6A52 (Modular models)

Note If the B7A Interface Unit is mounted to a Rack with a C200HW-PD024 24-VDC Power Supply Unit, supply
24 VDC from an independent power supply to the B7A Interface Unit or use a transformer to separate the
power supply line to the B7A Interface Unit from the power supply lines to the CPU Unit and I/O Power Sup-
ply Unit.

I/O indicator

ERR indicator

Connection terminals

Connection terminals for the B7A Link Terminal:

Connect this terminal to the SIG terminal of the
B7A Link Terminal.
Connect this terminal to the negative power ter-
minal of the B7A Link Terminal.

Supply 12 to 24 VDC.
12 to 24 VDC

202
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

I/O Indicator
Indicates the ON or OFF status of input from the B7A Link Terminal or the ON and OFF status of output to the B7A
Link Terminal.
ERR Indicator
Incorporated by the B7AI1 and lit when the B7AI1’s data transmission or reception is abnormal.
Connection Terminals
SIG: Connects to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.
V–: Connects to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.

! Caution If the terminals are not connected correctly, the internal circuitry of the B7A Link Terminal will be
damaged.

Note 1. The transmission cable must be a VCTF cable with a thickness of 0.75 mm2 minimum.
2. Do not wire power lines or high-tension lines along with the transmission cable in the same conduit.
Input Mode Selector
The B7AI1 incorporates an input mode selector on the back panel of the Unit, with which the following modes can
be set.
Input mode 15 points + 1 error 16 points
Function Fifteen-point input from the B7A Link Sixteen-point input from the B7A Link
Terminal is effective. Bit 15 is used as Terminal is effective.
transmission error bit.
Switch setting Upper side Lower side
Bit no. 00 to 14 Input 00 to input 14 Input 00 to input 14
ll i
allocation 15 Transmission error bit Input 15
Status of input indicator lamp 15 Not used Lit when input 15 is ON. Not lit when
input 15 is OFF.
Status of the ERR indicator Lit when there is a transmission error and OFF during normal transmission

The ERR indicator is lit when an error occurs. If the error is corrected, the ERR indicator is OFF at the next trans-
mission cycle.
When there is a transmission error, the B7A Link Terminal will hold the data just before the occurrence of the trans-
mission error. If there is a transmission error because the B7A Link Terminal is turned off, however, data 0 is trans-
mitted in the first transmission cycle when the B7A Link Terminal is turned on again.
Transmission errors between the C200H-B7AO1 and B7A Link Terminal are detected by the B7A Link Terminal
only. Check the ERR indicator and error bit for any error.
Performance Specifications
Item C200H-B7AI1 C200H-B7AO1
I/O points 16 points or 15 points and 1 error 16 output points
input
Transmission distance 500 m max. if power is supplied to the Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal
separately.
100 m max. if power is supplied to the Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal
from a single power supply. (24 VDC±10%)
Transmission delay Typ. 19.2 ms, 31 ms max.
Minimum input time (see note 1) --- 16 ms
Internal current consumption 5 VDC, 100 mA max.
External power supply (see note 2) 12 to 24 VDC ±10%, 10 mA min. 12 to 24 VDC ±10%, 30 mA min.
Weight 200 g max.
Note 1. The minimum input time refers to the minimum time required for reading the input signals from the CPU
Unit. The ON/OFF width of the signal transmitted from the CPU Unit to the Output Relay of the B7A Inter-
face Unit should be set to a value larger than the minimum input time.
2. The value of the external power supply does not include the value required by the B7A Link Terminal.

203
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Group-2 B7A Interface Units (C200H-B7Ajj)

A Group-2 B7A Interface Unit used with two or four B7A Link Terminals allows the transmission and reception of
32-point or 64-point I/O data over two-conductor cables.
Group-2 B7A Interface Unit

CPU
Unit

Input B7A Link Terminal

Sensor

Transmission Switch
distance: 500 m
max. Output B7A Link Terminal

Lamps and other loads

Group-2 B7A Interface Units can be mounted to a CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. They cannot be mounted
to Slave Racks.
The words allocated to Group-2 B7A Interface Units are determined by I/O number set on the Units. Units with 32
I/O points are allocated two words; Units with 64 I/O points are allocated four words.
Refer to the B7A Link Terminals Datasheet for more information on B7A Link Terminals.

Models
The following Group-2 B7A Interface Units are available.
B7A Interface Unit Inputs Outputs
C200H-B7A12 32 points None
C200H-B7A02 None 32 points
C200H-B7A21 16 points 16 points
C200H-B7A22 32 points 32points

204
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Connectable B7A Link Terminals

Only 16-point B7A Link Terminals can be connected to a B7A Interface Unit. These are listed in the following
tables.

Input Terminals
Type Model Transmission delay
Screw terminals B7A-T6j1 Standard ((19.2 ms))
B7AS-T6j1
B7A-T6j6 High-speed
g p ((3 ms))
B7AS-T6j6
Modular B7A-T6D2 Standard (19.2 ms)
B7A-T6D7 High-speed (3 ms)
PC connectors B7A-TjE3 Standard (19.2 ms)
B7A-TjE8 High-speed (3 ms)

Output Terminals
Type Model Transmission delay
Screw terminals B7A-R6jj1 Standard ((19.2 ms))
B7AS-R6jj1
B7A-R6jj6 High-speed
g p ((3 ms))
B7AS-R6jj6
Modular B7A-R6A52 Standard (19.2 ms)
B7A-R6A57 High-speed (3 ms)
PC connectors B7A-RjAj3 Standard (19.2 ms)
B7A-RjAj8 High-speed (3 ms)

Note 1. Do not connect Terminals with different transmission delays to the same Interface Unit. Doing so will
cause a transmission error.
2. B7A Link Terminals with 10-points and B7A Link Terminals with mixed I/O (8 inputs/8 outputs) cannot be
connected to B7A Interface Units. Use 16-point B7A Link Terminals. 16-point B7A Link Terminals
include 16-point (input or output) models, models with 2 circuits configured with 16 points, and models
with 16 points of mixed I/O.

Comparison between Standard and Group-2 B7A Interface Units

Type
yp Models Word allocations Connectable B7A Link Terminals
Transmission Transmission Points
delay errors
Standard C200H-B7AI1 Same as I/O Units (in order Standard Input status 16-point
mounted)
mounted). types only held Terminals only
C200H-B7AO2 (19.2 ms) automatically ((10-point,
p
32 i t and
32-point, d
Group-2 C200H-B7A12 Words 030 to 049 allocated Standard Switch setting
mixed I/O
according to I/O number setting (19 2 ms) and to hold or
(19.2
C200H-B7A02 Terminals cannot
Group 2 High-density
(same as Group-2 High density I/O high speed
high-speed reset Input
be connected.
connected
C200H-B7A21 Units; see note below) (3 ms) types status.
(set via
C200H-B7A22 switch)

Note In the case of Group-2 B7A Interface Units, words 030 to 049 (Group-2 High-density I/O Unit and B7A Inter-
face Unit Area) are allocated according to the setting of the I/O number setting switch on the front of the Unit
as shown in the following table. For mixed I/O Units, words are allocated in in the order output → input.

205
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Type Models Words Allocation order Example: For I/O

allocated per number 0
Unit
32 input points C200H-B7A12 2 2 words for inputs 030: input
32 output points C200H-B7A02 2 words for outputs 030: output
16 output points/16 input C200H-B7A21 1 word for outputs → 030: output
points 1 word for inputs 031: input
32 output points/32 input C200H-B7A22 4 2 words for outputs → 030: output
points 2 words for inputs 031: output
032: input
033: input

Note S B7A Link Terminals with 10-points and B7A Link Terminals with mixed I/O (8 inputs/8 outputs) cannot be
connected to B7A Interface Units. Use 16-point B7A Link Terminals. 16-point B7A Link Terminals include
16-point models (input and output), models with 2 circuits configured with 16 points, and models with 16
points of mixed I/O.
S Group-2 B7A Interface Units can be mounted to a CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack under a
C200Hj-CPUjj-(Z)E. They cannot be mounted to Slave Racks.
S B7A Interface Units can be connected to each other. To do so, the transmission delay times of the input
and output B7A Interface Units must be set to the same value.

Parts and Names (C200H-B7A22 shown below)

Front
I/O number switch
This switch determines the words allocated to the
Unit.

Status indicators
The indicators depend on the model of B7A Inter-
face Unit.

Connection terminals
Connect to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Terminal
and to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link
Terminal. The actual use of these terminals depends
on the B7A Interface Unit.

External Power Supply Terminals

Supply 12 to 24 VDC.

12 toto2424
12 VDC
VDC

206
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Back

DIP switch
Used to set the transmission delay,
transmission error processing mode, in-
put mode, and ERROR indicator opera-
tion.

Indicator Operation
The indicators depend on the model of B7A Interface Unit, as shown below.

Name Color Function

ERROR 1 Input Red Lights when an error occurs in transmissions from an Input B7A Link Terminal.
ERROR 2 transmission For the B7A12/22, ERROR 1 is for the first word allocated to the B7A Interface
ERROR error Unit; ERROR 2 is for the second word.
3ms Transmission Orange Lit when the transmission delay is set to the high-speed setting (3 ms).
delay setting Not lit when the transmission delay is set to the standard setting (19.2 ms).
LOAD OFF Transmission Orange Lit when the processing for transmission errors is set to reset input status.
error process Not lit when the processing for transmission errors is set to hold input status.
15IN+ERR Input mode Orange Lit when the input mode mode is set to use 15 inputs and 1 error input.
setting Not lit when the input mode mode is set to use 16 inputs.

I/O Number Setting

The setting of the I/O number determines the words allocated to the Interface Unit. Set the I/O number to between
0 and 9.

Setting in direction
of notch

Note 1. Turn off the power supply to the PC before changing the I/O number setting. Any new setting will not be
effective until the next time the power supply is turned on.
2. Use a flat-blade screw driver to change the I/O number setting. Be careful not to leave the switch halfway
between settings and be careful not to damage the switch.

207
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

The following table shows the words allocated according to the I/O number. The 32-point Units are the
C200H-B7A12, C200H-B7A02, and C200H-B7A21. The 64-point Unit is the C200H-B7A22.

I/O No. Words

32-point Units 64-point Unit
0 IR 030 and IR 031 IR 030 to IR 033
1 IR 032 and IR 033 IR 032 to IR 035
2 IR 034 and IR 035 IR 034 to IR 037
3 IR 036 and IR 037 IR 036 to IR 039
4 IR 038 and IR 039 IR 038 to IR 041
5 IR 040 and IR 041 IR 040 to IR 043
6 IR 042 and IR 043 IR 042 to IR 045
7 IR 044 and IR 045 IR 044 to IR 047
8 IR 046 and IR 047 IR 046 to IR 049
9 IR 048 and IR 049 Do not use.

Note 1. Be sure that the same words are not allocated to more than one Unit. For example, if you set a 64-point
Unit to I/O number 0, you cannot use I/O number 1 for any Unit.
2. The above words are also allocated to Group-2 High-density I/O Units. Be sure that the same words are
not allocated to more than one Unit.

DIP Switch Settings

Set the DIP switch as described before for the various models of B7A Interface Units.
C200H-B7A22/12
Pin Function OFF ON
1 Transmission delay Standard (19.2 ms) High-speed (3 ms)
2 Transmission error process Hold status Reset Inputs
Factory setting 3 Input mode 16 inputs 15 inputs + error input
(pins 4 and 5 ON) 4 ERROR 1 indicator enable Disabled Enabled
5 ERROR 2 indicator enable Disabled Enabled
6 Not used. NA NA

C200H-B7A21
Pin Function OFF ON
1 Transmission delay Standard (19.2 ms) High-speed (3 ms)
2 Transmission error process Hold status Reset Inputs
Factory setting
3 Input mode 16 inputs 15 inputs + error input
(pin 5 ON)
4 ERROR indicator enable Disabled Enabled
5 Not used. NA NA
6 Not used. NA NA

C200H-B7A02
Pin Function OFF ON
1 Transmission delay Standard (19.2 ms) High-speed (3 ms)
2 Not used. NA NA
Factory setting
3 Not used. NA NA
(all pins OFF)
4 Not used. NA NA
5 Not used. NA NA
6 Not used. NA NA

Transmission Delay
Pin 1 is used to set the transmission delay. The same delay is used for all words allocated to the Unit.

208
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Set the transmission delay to match that of the B7A Link Terminal. A transmission error will occur if the same trans-
mission delay is not set.
The “3ms” indicator will be lit whenever the high-speed (3 ms) transmission delay is set.
Transmission Error Process
Pin 2 is used to turned ON to specify resetting input status when transmission errors occur. If pin 2 is turned OFF,
input status will be held when transmission errors occur.
The LOAD OFF indicator will be lit whenever pin 2 is turned ON.
Input Mode
Pin 3 is turned ON to specify use of only 15 inputs and the use of bit 15 as a Transmission Error Flag. If pin 3 is OFF,
16 normal inputs can be used.
The “15IN+ERR” indicator will be lit whenever pin 3 is turned ON.
ERROR Indicators
Pin 4 or pins 4 and 5 are turned ON to enable the ERROR, ERROR 1, and/or ERROR 2 indicators. These indica-
tors will not light even if a transmission error occurs if the corresponding pin is turned OFF.

Transmission Error Precautions

Startup
The Transmission Error Flag for the B7A Interface Unit will be OFF when power is turned on to the
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE. If normal transmissions with the B7A Link Terminal are not possible within about 10
ms, the Transmission Error Flag (bit 15) will turn ON (i.e., if its operation is enabled by the input mode setting).
All input bits will remain OFF until normal transmissions are achieved.
Inputs
When a transmission error occurs, input status will be either held or all inputs will be reset according to the setting
for the transmission error process, and the Transmission Error Flag (bit 15) will turn ON (i.e., if its operation is
enabled by the input mode setting). The Transmission Error Flag will go OFF and the input status will return to
normal when normal transmissions are achieved again.
Outputs
Transmission errors for Output B7A Link Terminals are not detected at the B7A Interface Unit and must be con-
firmed using the error indicators or error outputs on the Link Terminal.

209
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Wiring
Terminal Names and Allocations
The use of the terminals depends on the model of the B7A Interface Unit. “m” indicates the first word allocated to
the Unit according to the I/O number setting and can be calculated as follows:
m = 030 + (2 x I/O number)
C200H-B7A22
Terminal Name Function Word
B0 SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal. m
B1 – OUT1 Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
B2 SIG OUT2 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal. m+1
B3 – OUT2 Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
B4 SIG IN1 Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal. m+2
B5 – IN1 Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
B6 SIG IN2 Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal. m+3
B7 – IN2 Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
B8 NC Not used. NA
A0 to A7
B9 +V Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
A8 –V Connect to – terminal on external power supply.

C200H-B7A21
Terminal Name Function Word
B0 SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal. m
B1 – OUT1 Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
B2, B3 NC Not used. NA
B4 SIG IN1 Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal. m+1
B5 – IN1 Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
B6 to B8 NC Not used. NA
A0 to A7
B9 +V Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
A8 –V Connect to – terminal on external power supply.

C200H-B7A12
Terminal Name Function Word
B0 SIG IN1 Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal. m
B1 – IN1 Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
B2, B3 NC Not used. NA
B4 SIG IN2 Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal. m+1
B5 – IN2 Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
B6 to B8 NC Not used. NA
A0 to A7
B9 +V Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
A8 –V Connect to – terminal on external power supply.

210
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

C200H-B7A02
Terminal Name Function Word
B0 SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal. m
B1 – OUT1 Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
B2, B3 NC Not used. NA
B4 SIG OUT2 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal. m+1
B5 – OUT2 Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
B6 to B8 NC Not used. NA
A0 to A7
B9 +V Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
A8 –V Connect to – terminal on external power supply.

Recommended Cables and Transmission Distance

The following cables are recommended to connect the B7A Interface Unit to B7A Link Terminals. The wiring meth-
od and transmission distance depend on the transmission delay and on whether or not a common power supply is
being used for the B7A Link Terminal and the Interface Unit.
Standard Transmission Delays (19.2 ms): Cap-tire Cable
Power supply Cable Transmission distance
Common VCTF, 0.75 mm2 x 3 conductors 100 m max.
Separate VCTF ,0.75 mm2 x 2 conductors 500 m max.

High-speed Transmission Delays (3 ms): Shielded Cable

Power supply Cable Transmission distance
Common Shielded cable, 0.75 mm2 x 3 conductors 50 m max.
Separate Shielded cable, 0.75 mm2 x 2 conductors 100 m max.

Terminal Construction
Use hook-type crimp connectors with a line thickness of 0.25 to 1.65 mm2. The
construction of the terminals is shown in the illustration.

Wiring Method
Standard Transmission Delays (19.2 ms)
Common Power Supply
B7A Link Terminal
B7A Interface Unit

Transmission distance: 100 m max.

B7A Link Terminal

Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75 mm2 or higher

12 to 24 VDC

211
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Separate Power Supplies B7A Link Terminal

B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 VDC

Transmission distance: 500 m max.

B7A Link Terminal

12 to 24 VDC

Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75 mm2 or higher

12 to 24 VDC

High-speed Transmission Delays (3 ms): Shielded Cable

Common Power Supply B7A Link Terminal

B7A Interface Unit

Transmission distance: 50 m max.

B7A Link Terminal

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher
GND

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher

24 VDC±10% GND

Separate Power Supplies B7A Link Terminal

B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 VDC

Transmission distance: 100 m max.

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher B7A Link Terminal

GND
12 to 24 VDC

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher

12 to 24 VDC GND

Note 1. We recommend grounding the shielded cable.

2. If shielded cable is not used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 m regardless of whether a com-
mon or separate power supplies are used. (Use 0.75 mm2 or higher VCTF cable.)
3. To prevent noise on the transmission cable, do not lay it near power cables or high-voltage lines.

212
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications Appendix B

Specifications
Item C200H-B7A12 C200H-B7A02 C200H-B7A21 C200H-B7A22
I/O points 32 input points or 32 output points 16 output points and 32 output points and
30 input points and 2 16 input points or 32 input points or
error inputs 15 input points + 1 30 input points + 2
error input error inputs
Transmission One-way distributed multiplex transmission
method
Transmission Standard: 500 m max.
distance (see High-speed: 100 m max.
note 1)
Transmission Standard: Typ. 19.2 ms, 31 ms max.
delay High-speed: Typ. 3 ms, 5 ms max.
Minimum input Standard: 16 ms
time (see note High-speed: 2.4 ms
2, 3)
Internal current 5 VDC, 100 mA max.
consumption
External power 12 to 24 VDC ±10%
supply (see
note 4) 0.05 A min. 0.06 A min. 0.05 A min. 0.08 A min.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 35 x 130 x 128 mm (W x H x D)
Note 1. The transmission distance also depends on whether a common or separate power supplies are used.
2. The minimum input time refers to the minimum time required for reading the input signals from the CPU
Unit.
3. The ON/OFF width of the signal transmitted from the CPU Unit to the Output Relay of the B7A Interface
Unit should be set to a value larger than the minimum input time.
4. The capacity of the external power supply does not include the capacity required by the B7A Link Termi-
nal.

Dimensions

x
x
x
x
130 Back-
plane

x
x
x
x

128
35 145

213
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Appendix C
Unit Current and Power Consumption

Maximum Current and Power Supplied

There are limits to the current and power that can be supplied to each Rack and Unit. When designing the system,
take the current consumption into account.
Follow the charts below and be careful that the total current consumption does not exceed the maximum current
and maximum total power supplied.
Current Supplied
Model number Max. current supplied Maximum
5V 26 V 24 V power
(No-voltage supplied
contact
current)
C200HW-PA204 4.6 A 0.625 A --- 30 W
C200HW-PA204S 4.6 A 0.625 A 0.8 A 30 W (See
note 2.)
C200HW-PA204R 4.6 A 0.625 A --- 30 W
C200HW-PA209R 9.0 A 1.3 A --- 45 W
C200HW-PA204C 4.6 A 0.625 A --- 30 W
C200HW-PD024 4.6 A 0.625 A --- 30 W
C200HW-PD025 5.3 A 1.3 A --- 40 W

Note 1. The sum total of the 5-V, 26-V, and 24-V power consumptions must be 30 W max. for the C200HW-
PA204j, 40 W max. for the C200HW-PD025, or 45 W max. for the PA209.
2. For C200HW-PA204S, the total also includes the power consumption of the power supply output termi-
nals.
Design the system so that the following conditions are satisfied.
Condition 1
(1) (Total current consumption of all Units in the 5-V system) ≤ (the figure in the
5-V column)
(2) (Total current consumption of all Units in the 26-V system) ≤ (the figure in the
26-V column)
(3) (Total current consumption of all Units in the 24-V system) ≤ (the figure in the
24-V column)
Condition 2
(1) x 5 V + (2) x 26 V + (3) x 24 V ≤ (maximum power supplied)
Calculating Current and Power Consumption
The method of calculating current and power consumption is demonstrated here using the following Unit combina-
tions as examples.
Example 1: For C200HW-PA204S
OC221 Contact Output Units: 4 Units
ID211 No-voltage Input Units: 3 Units
LK202 Host Link Unit: 1 Unit
External power supply used: 0.3 A
Power Supply Current Consumption Power Consumption
5-V system 0.01 x 7 + 0.25 = 0.32 A (≤ 4.6 A) 0.32 A x 5 V = 1.6 W
26-V system 0.075 x 4 = 0.30 A (≤ 0.6 A) 0.30 A x 26 V = 7.8 W
24-V system 0.06 x 3 + 0.3 = 0.48 A (≤ 0.8 A) 0.48 A x 24 V = 11.52 W
Total = 20.92 W (≤ 30 W)

215
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Unit Current and Power Consumption Appendix C

Example 2: For C200HW-PA204S

ID212 DC Input Units: 6 Units
CT002 High-speed Counter Units: 2 Units
External power supply used (for ID212): 0.8 A
Power Supply Current Consumption Power Consumption
5-V system 0.01 x 6 + 0.3 x 2 = 0.66 A (≤ 4.6 A) 0.66 A x 5 V = 3.3 W
26-V system 0 0
24-V system Ext. power supply = 0.8 A (≤ 0.8 A) 0.8 A x 24 V = 19.2 W
Total = 22.5 W (≤ 30W)
Example 3: For C200HW-PA204S
OC221 Contact Output Units: 4 Units
ID217 High-density Input Unit: 1 Unit
OD219 High-density Output Unit: 1 Unit
CT002 High-speed Counter Unit: 1 Unit
External power supply used (for ID217): 0.3 A
Power Supply Current Consumption Power Consumption
5-V system 0.01 x 4 + 0.12 + 0.27 +0.3
= 0.73 A (≤ 4.6 A) 0.73 A x 5 V = 3.65 W
26-V system 0.075 x 4 = 0.30 A (≤ 0.6 A) 0.3 A x 26 V = 7.8 W
24-V system Ext. power supply = 0.8 A (≤ 0.8 A) 0.8 A x 24 V = 19.2 W
Total = 18.65 W (≤ 30 W)
Calculating Power Consumption for Racks
The total power consumption (primary power input) for an individual Rack can be
broadly calculated as shown in the following examples.
Example 1: CPU Rack
Total power consumption of Units + 3.5
0.6 x 0.55 (VA)
3.5 = CPU Unit power consumption
0.6 = 60% efficiency
0.55= Power rate
Example 2: All Other Racks
Total power consumption of Units + 2
0.6 x 0.55 (1) (VA)
2 = I/O Power Supply Unit (Remote I/O Slave Unit) power consumption
0.6 = 60% efficiency
0.55 (1) = Power rate
(Number in parentheses: when RT002-P or RT202 is used.)
Current Drawn by CPU Unit Model 5-V supply 26-V supply
Units and Backplanes
CPU Unit C200HE-CPUjj-E 0.5 A ---
C200HG-CPUjj-E
C200HX-CPUjj-E
CPU Backplane C200HW-BCjjj 0.1 A ---
I/O Backplane C200HW-BIjjj 0.15 A ---
Current Drawn by Unit Model 5-V supply 26-V supply
Communications Boards
Communications C200HW-COM01 0.03 A ---
B d
Board C200HW-COM02 0.1 A ---
C200HW-COM03 0.2 A ---
C200HW-COM04-E 0.1 A ---
C200HW-COM05-E 0.1 A ---
C200HW-COM06-E 0.2 A ---

216
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Unit Current and Power Consumption Appendix C

Current Drawn by Standard Unit Model number 5-V supply 26-V supply
I/O Units
DC Input C200H-ID211 0.01 A each ---
C200H-ID212
AC Input C200H-IA121
C200H-IA122/IA122V
C200H-IA221
C200H-IA222/IA222V
AC/DC Input C200H-IM211
C200H-IM212
Contact Output C200H-OC221 0.01 A each 0.075 A per
p
C200H-OC222 8 points
i
when points
C200H-OC223 are simulta-
C200H-OC224 neouslyy ON
C200H-OC225 0.05 A
C200H-OC222N 0.01 A 0.09 A per 8
points when
C200H-OC224N 0.01 A points are si-
multaneously
C200H-OC226N 0.03 A ON
Transistor Output C200H-OD411 0.14 A ---
C200H-OD211 0.16 A
C200H-OD212 0.18 A
C200H-OD213 0.14 A
C200H-OD214
C200H-OD216 0.01 A each 0.075 A per
8 points
when points
C200H-OD217 are simulta-
neously ON
C200H-OA21A 0.16 A ---
Triac Output C200H-OA222V 0.20A
C200H-OA223 0.18 A
C200H-OA224 0.27 A
Analog Timer C200H-TM001 0.06 A
Standard B7A C200H-B7AI1 0.10 A
I f
Interface C200H-B7AO1
Interrupt Input C200HS-INT01 0.02 A

Current Drawn by Group-2 Unit Model number 5-V supply 26-V supply
High-density I/O Units
DC Input C200H-ID111 0.12 A ---
C200H-ID216 0.1 A
C200H-ID217 0.12 A
C200H-ID218 0.1 A
C200H-ID219 0.12 A
Transistor Output C200H-OD218 0.18 A
C200H-OD219 0.27 A
C200H-OD21B 0.18 A

Current Drawn by Group-2 Unit Model number 5-V supply 26-V supply
B7A Interface Units
B7A Interface Unit C200H-B7A12/02 0.10 A ---
(G
(Group-2
2UUnits)
i ) C200H-B7A21/22

217
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Unit Current and Power Consumption Appendix C

Current Drawn by Other Unit Model number 5-V supply 26-V supply
Units
Host Link C200H-LK101-PV1 0.25 A ---
C200H-LK201-V1 0.15 A
C200H-LK202-V1 0.25 A
PC Link C200H-LK401 0.35 A

DeviceNet Master C200HW-DRM21 0.25 A ---

CompoBus/S C200HW-SRM21 0.15 A ---

Master

Remote Master C200H-RM001-PV1 0.20 A ---

C200H-RM201 0.25 A
SYSMAC LINK C200HW-SLK13/SLK14/ 0.80 A
SLK23/SLK24
SYSMAC NET Link C200HS-SNT32 1.00 A
Power Supply C200H-APS01/APS02/ 0A
Adapter APS03

Current Drawn by Special Unit Model number 5-V supply 26-V supply
I/O Units
TTL Input C200H-ID501 0.13 A ---
DC Input C200H-ID215
TTL Output C200H-OD501 0.22 A
Transistor Output C200H-OD215
TTL I/O C200H-MD501 0.18 A
DC Input/Transistor
p C200H-MD115
O
Output C200H-MD215
High-speed
g p C200H-CT001-V1 0.30 A
C
Counter C200H-CT002
C200H-CT021 0.45 A
Position Control C200H-NC111 0.15 A
C200H-NC112
C200H-NC211 0.50 A
C200H-NC113 0.30 A
C200H-NC213
C200H-NC413 0.50 A
Analog Input C200H-AD001 0.55 A
C200H-AD002 0.45 A
Analog Output C200H-DA001 0.65 A
C200H-DA002 0.60 A
C200H-PID03
Motion Control Unit C200H-MC221 0.65 A
(0.85 A when a
Teaching Box is
connected)
Temperature
p C200H-TS001/TS002 0.45 A
S
Sensor Input
I C200H-TS101/TS102
ASCII C200H-ASC02 0.20 A
Voice Output C200H-OV001 0.30 A

ID Sensor C200H-IDS01-V1 0.25 A 0.12 A

C200H-IDS21

218
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Unit Current and Power Consumption Appendix C

Unit Model number 5-V supply 26-V supply

Fuzzy Logic C200H-FZ001 0.30 A ---
Temperature
p C200H-TC001 0.33 A
C
Control
l C200H-TC002
C200H-TC003
C200H-TC101
C200H-TC102
C200H-TC103
Cam Positioner C200H-CP114 0.30 A
Controller Link Unit C200HW-CLK21 0.30 A ---
PC Card Unit C200HW-PCU01 1.7 A ---
C200HW-PCS01

Maximum Current and Model number Max. current supplied Maximum

Power Supplied power
5V 26 V 24 V supplied
C200H-RT001-P 2.7 A 0.6 A 0.8 A 28 W
C200H-RT002-P --- 23 W
C200H-RT201 0.8 A 28 W
C200H-RT202 --- 23 W

Note The sum total of the 5-V, 26-V, and 24-V power consumptions must be equal to or less than the value for the
maximum power supplied given in the above table (28 W or 23 W).

219
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Appendix D
Dimensions and Mounting Methods

Racks
The dimensions shown below are for both the CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Racks. The C dimension for the Pro-
gramming Console will increase by 30 mm when the Programming Console Adapter C200H-BP001 is used, and
will increase by 50 mm when the Programming Console Adapter C200H-BP002 is used.

CPU Units

Memory Cassettes

73.2

44 9.1

Communications Boards

C200HW-COM02/03/05-E/06-E C200HW-COM01/04-E

221
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Dimensions and Mounting Methods Appendix D

Backplanes

130

W
17

Backplane Model Width (W)

CPU Backplane
p C200HW-BC031 260 mm
C200HW-BC051 330 mm
C200HW-BC081-V1 435 mm
C200HW-BC101-V1 505 mm
I/O Backplane
p C200HW-BI031 189 mm
C200HW-BI051 259 mm
C200HW-BI081-V1 364 mm
C200HW-BI101-V1 434 mm

I/O Connecting Cables

The dimensions shown below are for I/O Connecting Cables.

74 64

49
15

Cable Length (L)

C200H-CN311 30 cm
C200H-CN711 70 cm
C200H-CN221 2m
C200H-CN521 5m
C200H-CN131 10 m

222
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Dimensions and Mounting Methods Appendix D

Power Supply Units

C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PD024

C200HW-PA209R
C200HW-PD025

C200HW-PA204C

11

223
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Dimensions and Mounting Methods Appendix D

C200H-PRO27 Programming Console

The dimensions shown below are for the Programming Console.

192

96
(30)
48

C200H-CN222/CN422 Connecting Cable

33

29 12 2000 (4000)

Standard I/O Units

The dimensions shown below are for the two shapes of Standard I/O Units mentioned throughout these specifica-
tions.

10-terminal Terminal Block (A-shape I/O Units)

x
x
130 Back-
plane

x
x

101
35 118

224
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Dimensions and Mounting Methods Appendix D

10-terminal Terminal Block (E-shape I/O Units)

Backplane
x
130

x
x

121
35
138

C200H-OA223

19-terminal Terminal Block (B-shape I/O Units)

x
x
x
x
130 Back-
plane

x
x
x
x

128
35 145

19-terminal Terminal Block (Extended B-shape I/O Units)

x
x
Backplane

x
x
130

x
x
x
x

152
35 169

225
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Dimensions and Mounting Methods Appendix D

Terminal Dimensions
M3.5

7.3
8.5

Interrupt Input Unit

The dimensions shown below are for the Interrupt Input Unit classified as Special I/O Units.

Backplane
x
x
130

x
x

35 101
118

Standard B7A Interface Unit

The dimensions shown below are for the B7A Interface Unit classified as Special I/O Units.

Backplane

130

35 101
118

Group-2 B7A Interface Units The dimensions shown below are for the Group-2 B7A Interface Units.
Backplane

226
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Dimensions and Mounting Methods Appendix D

Analog Timer Unit

The dimensions shown below are for the Analog Timer Unit classified as Special I/O Units.

130

Backplane
35 101

118

Group-2 High-density I/O Units

The dimensions shown below are for the Group-2 High-density I/O Units.

C and D Types

Backplane
Backplane

130

118
35 101
Approx. 143

High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)

The dimensions shown below are for the High-density I/O Units classified as Special I/O Units.
Backplane

130

35 101

227
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Dimensions and Mounting Methods Appendix D

Dimensions with Unit Mounted

Fujitsu Connector G79-jC Connecting Cable

G79-jC

Backplane

Backplane
Connecting Connecting
cable Cable

118 118

Approx. 163 145

Mounting Dimensions
A±0.2 7
Four, M4

130 Backplane 118±0.2

68 to 108 80 to 120

130 Backplane 118±0.2

6
Four, M4 W

Backplane Model A±0.2 W

CPU Backplane
p C200HW-BC031 246 mm 260 mm
C200HW-BC051 316 mm 330 mm
C200HW-BC081-V1 421 mm 435 mm
C200HW-BC101-V1 491 mm 505 mm
I/O Backplane
p C200HW-BI031 175 mm 189 mm
C200HW-BI051 245 mm 259 mm
C200HW-BI081-V1 350 mm 364 mm
C200HW-BI101-V1 420 mm 434 mm

228
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Dimensions and Mounting Methods Appendix D

Panel Mounting of C200H-PRO27 Programming Console

Bracket

Two screws

Panel thickness (t = 1.0 to 3.2)

The following is the standard panel cut dimensions for the Programming Console (conforming to DIN 43700).

186 +1.1
0

92 +0.8
0

Use the C200H-ATT01 Mounting Bracket (sold separately) to mount the C200H-PRO27 Programming Console to
panels.

75.5

116

14.1
9.1

229
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Dimensions and Mounting Methods Appendix D

Take the space required for the cable into consideration when mounting the Programming Console to panels.

37
15

Approximately 80 mm is
required.

Use either one of the

connectors.

Approximately 70 mm is
required.

230
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Appendix E
Power Supply Units with Replacement
Notification

Principle of Replacement Notification

The Power Supply Unit has a built-in electrolytic capacitor. The electrolytic capacitor is impregnated with electro-
lytic solution that starts to penetrate the sealing rubber from the time of manufacture. As time elapses, the internal
electrolytic solution continues to evaporate, resulting in decreased electrostatic capacity and deterioration in other
characteristics. Over time, the characteristic deterioration of the electrolytic capacitor prevents the Power Supply
Unit from being utilized to its full capacity. In particular, the speed at which the electrolytic capacitor deteriorates
fluctuates greatly with the ambient temperature (generally, a temperature rise of 10_C will double the rate of a
reaction, as stated by Arrhenius’ law).
The C200HW-PA204C Power Supply Unit with Replacement Notification monitors the internal temperature of the
Power Supply Unit while the power is turned ON, and calculates the level of deterioration of the electrolytic capaci-
tor from the operating time and internal temperature.
The replacement notification function displays the approximate time until the Power Supply Unit will stop function-
ing at its full capacity due to the characteristic deterioration of the electrolytic capacitor, based on the calculated
level of deterioration. When 6 months are remaining until replacement is required, the alarm output will turn OFF.
Note The replacement notification function provides an indication of when the deterioration of the electrolytic ca-
pacitor will prevent the power supply functioning at its full capacity. It does not provide information on fail-
ures occurring due to other causes.

Power Supply Unit with Replacement Notification

Model Specifications
C200HW-PA204C Name: Power Supply Unit with Replacement Notification
Ratings: 100 to 240 VAC
Output capacity: 4.6 A at 5 VDC, 0.625 A at 26 VDC, total of 30 W

Power Supply Unit Replacement Notification Module

C200HW-PA204C
Replacement notification display
(7-segment, red)

POWER indicator (green)

Alarm output (replacement

notification output)
TEST switch

Function
Replacement Notification Function Displays
The replacement notification for the Power Supply Unit is shown using three 7-segment LED displays.

231
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification Appendix E

• At time of purchase “FUL” is displayed. The display changes to “HLF” as the electrolytic capacitor deteriorates.
Depending on the operating environment, however, “HLF” may not be displayed.
• When the time until replacement is required drops below 2 years, the display will change corresponding to the
operating time from “1.5” to “1.0” to “0.5” to “0.0”/“A02.” When the remaining service life reaches 6 months or
less, the display will alternate between “0.0” and “A02” in 2-second intervals.

Capacity at
time of
manufacture

Replacement
required

Remaining
Electrolytic Replacement notification 2.0 yr 1.5 yr 1.0 yr 0.5 yr 0 yr service life
capacitor level display (7-segment)
Alarm output (replacement
notification output) Output ON Output OFF

The output turns OFF when the remain-

ing life span reaches 6 months, and the
following display is repeatedly alternated.

Note 1. The time remaining until replacement does not include periods when the power is turned OFF.
2. Until approximately one month of operating time has accumulated, the display will always be “FUL” and
the alarm output will remain ON (conducting) due to the estimated deterioration speed.
3. The time remaining until replacement will vary the operating and storage conditions, so periodically
check the display.
4. Fluctuation in the time remaining until replacement may result in the alarm output repeatedly turning ON
and OFF.
5. The precision of the replacement notification function will be adversely affected by applications in which
the power is frequently turned ON and OFF.
6. Due to the service life of the electronic components, replace the Power Supply Unit approximately 15
years after purchase, even if the replacement notification display or output has not indicated that re-
placement is required.

Alarm Output (Replacement Notification Output)

The output remains ON until the remaining service life drops below 6 months and then turns OFF.
Note The alarm output will also turn OFF under the following conditions.
• The AC input to the Power Supply Unit is turned OFF.
• An error is detected by the self-diagnostic function.
• The TEST switch is pressed for at least 3 seconds.

232
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification Appendix E

Reference: Example of Using the Alarm Output

Monitoring Power Supply Replacement Notification in the System

(6 Months or Less Until Replacement Is Required)

Alarm output

Turns OFF when 6 months remains

until replacement is required.
Alarm output
TIM 000 5 s

Internal Flag

The Flag is programmed to allow for the delay in the alarm output at system startup. The Flag does not turn ON
when the alarm output is ON (normal operation). When the alarm output turns OFF (replacement required), the
Flag turns ON, and the replacement notification can be monitored from the system.

Maintenance Function Using the TEST Switch

The TEST switch is used initially or periodically to check the connection status between the
alarm output and external devices.
• Press the TEST switch for at least 3 seconds to display “A02” and force the alarm output OFF. Release
the switch to return to normal operating status.
• Press the TEST switch for less than 3 seconds to display the unit version information for the
Power Supply Unit.

Precautions

• Replace the Power Supply Unit within 6 months when the display on the front panel of the Power Supply
Unit alternates between 0.0 and A02 or the alarm output automatically turns OFF.
• Maintain an ambient storage temperature of –20 to 30_C and humidity of 25% to 70% when storing the
product (with the power turned OFF) for longer than 3 months to keep the replacement notification func-
tion in optimum working condition. The replacement time is calculated from when the power is turned
ON only. The precision of the replacement period will decline if the electrolytic capacitor deteriorates
during storage.

Display and Alarm Output Operation

Normal Display: Replacement Notification Display
When 6 months or less are remaining until replacement is required, the display will alternate between “0.0” and
“A02” (in 2 second intervals), and the alarm output will turn OFF.

Remaining service life:

1 year to 6 months Remaining service life: 6 months max.

Alarm output

233
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification Appendix E

Operation at Powerup
The following initial display is shown when the power is turned ON, after which the replacement notification is dis-
played. The alarm output turns ON approximately 0.2 seconds after the power is turned ON.

Power ON Display start Replacement

Initial display (approx. 1.1 s) required
display
Display

Alarm
output
1s max.

0.2s max.

When replacement is already required, the alarm display will follow the initial display. The alarm output will turn ON
approximately 0.2 seconds after the power is turned ON, and then turn OFF after approximately 5 seconds.
Power ON Display start
Alarm output OFF
Initial display (approx. 1.1 s) Alarm display

Display

Alarm
output

1s max. 5s max.

0.2s max.

Operation at Power OFF

When the power is turned OFF, the display will turn OFF after the PC operation stops. The alarm output will turn
OFF after the display turns OFF.
Replacement Power PC operation Notification
notification interrup- stopped display
display tion OFF Alarm output

Display

Alarm
output
Approx. 70 ms
(See note.)

100 VAC: Approx. 2 s

200 VAC: Approx. 7 s
(See note.)

If replacement is already required, the display will turn OFF after the PC operation stops. When the display turns
OFF, the alarm output will turn ON momentarily and then turn OFF again.

Alarm display Power PC operation

interrup- stopped Notification display OFF Alarm output
tion + alarm output ON

Display

Alarm
output Approx. 70 ms
(See note.)

100 VAC: Approx. 2 s

200 VAC: Approx. 7 s
(See note.)

Note The values shown are reference values (calculated for a no-load status on the Power Supply Unit’s output).

234
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification Appendix E

Operation when TEST Switch Is Pressed

The following operation will be performed when the TEST switch on the replacement notification function module
is pressed.
When the switch is pressed for less than 3 seconds, the unit version will be displayed 3 times at 0.5-second inter-
vals.
When the switch is pressed for at least 3 seconds, the alarm output will momentarily turn OFF, and the alarm dis-
play A02 will be shown. The operation will return to the normal display and output when the switch is released. Use
the TEST switch to check the connection between the replacement notification output and devices.
1. Operation when TEST switch is pressed for less than 3 seconds.

2. Operation when TEST switch is pressed for 3 seconds or longer.

Note Under general operating conditions, the Power Supply Unit’s replacement notification function will be acti-
vated after several years or later. When the Power Supply Unit is in use for a long period of time, regularly
check operation using the TEST switch, and confirm that the alarm output is operating normally.

Self-diagnostic Function
Error Display Alarm Error details (cause) Recovery method
name output
status
Unit OFF Internal overheating has occurred in the Remove the cause of the
overheated Power Supply Unit as a result of usage overheating error.
error under conditions that exceed the specified
values, insufficient ventilation, or incorrect
installation. (See note.)
Unit error OFF System error from external noise or Turn ON the input’s power supply
hardware malfunction. again.
If the Unit does not recover, the
error may be caused by a Unit
malfunction.
Consult with your OMRON
representative.

Note If the error continues for 3 hours or longer, the replacement notification function will be disabled. Even if the
cause of the overheating is removed, the display will continue as “Hot,” and the notification output will re-
main OFF. In this state, the internal parts may deteriorate even if the PC operation is normal, so replace the
Power Supply Unit.

235
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification Appendix E

Precautions when Replacing Earlier Units

The following precautions apply when replacing a C200HW-PA204/PA204S/PA204R with a C200HW-PA204C.
Terminal Wiring
• Be sure to wire the ground terminals correctly. Incorrect ground terminal wiring will adversely affect the
Unit’s resistance to noise. (For details on terminal arrangements for each Power Supply Unit, refer to
Part Names and Functions on page 19.)
• The C200HW-PA204C is not provided with a service power supply and RUN output (RUN).
Startup Time
• The time from when the power is turned ON until the PC operation starts is approximately 1 second fast-
er. Make sure that the system will not be adversely affected by the change in timing.
Power Failure Detection Voltage
• The power failure detection voltage is 85 V. The PC will stop operating if the voltage drops below this
voltage level.
Note If the previously used Power Supply Unit was used with 200 to 240 VAC, power failures were detected when
the voltage dropped to 170 V or lower and the PC operation stopped. With C200HW-PA204C, however,
operation will not stop between 85 V and 170 V. Therefore, make sure that the system will not be adversely
affected by the change in detection voltage.

Comparison between the C200HW-PA204C and the

C200HW-PA204
Item C200HW-PA204C C200HW-PA204 (Previous Unit)
Input specifications 100 to 240 VAC (wide range) 100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC
(voltage selected)
Power failure detection voltage 85 V or lower 100 to 120 VAC: 85 V or lower
200 to 240 VAC: 170 V or lower
Power supply startup time (See note.) 200 ms max. 1,500 ms max.
Service power supply Not supported Not supported (Supported by the
PA204S)
RUN contact output Not supported (for future expansion) Not supported (Supported by the
PA204R)
Terminal block wiring
AC input AC

Voltage
selector

Alarm output
(replacement
notification
output)
Unconnected
Unconnected terminals
terminals

POWER indicator On replacement notification module On hood of Power Supply Unit

Replacement notification Supported Not supported
(7-segment display + transistor
outputs)

Note The time from when the external input (AC power supply) is input until 5 V or 26 V is output.

236
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Glossary

ASCII code [A(merican) S(tandard) C(ode for) I(nformation) I(nterchange)] A standard com-
puter code used to facilitate the interchange of information among various types
of data-processing equipment.

ASCII Unit An Intelligent I/O Unit. The ASCII Unit has its own CPU and 16 kilobytes of
memory. This Unit enables communication between the PC and any other de-
vice which uses ASCII code. The ASCII Unit can be programmed in BASIC.

Backplane A base to which Units are mounted to form a Rack. Backplanes provide a series
of connectors for these Units along with wiring to connect them to the CPU Unit
and Power Supply. Backplanes also provide connectors used to connect them to
other Backplanes. In some Systems, different Backplanes are used for different
Racks; in other Systems, Racks differ only by the Units mounted to them.

back-up A copy of existing data which is valuable if data is accidentally erased.

baud rate Transfer speed between two devices in a system measured in bits per second.
For example, an optical sensor might be configured to send its information to the
personal computer at 9600 baud. It is important for both of the devices to be set
to the same baud rate.

bit The smallest piece of information that can be represented on a computer. A bit
has the value of either zero or one, corresponding to the electrical signals ON
and OFF. A bit is one binary digit.

central processing unit A device that is capable of storing a program and data, and executing the set of
instructions contained in the program. In a PC System, the central processing
unit executes the program, processes I/O signals, communicates with external
devices, etc.

communication cable Cable used to transfer data between components of a control system and con-
forming to the RS-232C or RS-422 standards.

Communications Board A board that is mounted to the optional slot of a C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit. With
a Communications Board, the CPU Unit can communicate with the SYSMAC
LINK Unit, SYSMAC NET Link Unit, Programmable Terminal, Temperature Con-
troller, personal computer, bar code reader, or any other peripheral device via
RS-232C, RS-422, or RS-485.

Control System All of the hardware and software components used to control other devices. A
Control System includes the PC System, the PC programs, and all I/O devices
that are used to control or obtain feedback from the controlled system.

counter A PC function that counts the number of occurrences of a certain event.

CPU An acronym for central processing unit.

cycle time The total time it takes the PC to perform internal operations, i.e., reset the watch-
dog timer, read the program, receive input data, send output data, and execute
instructions. Cycle time is monitored by the watchdog timer within the PC, and if
it takes longer than a certain specified amount of time, an error message may be
generated, or the CPU Unit may just stop. Cycle times will differ depending on
the configuration of the system.

237
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Glossary

data area An area in the PC’s memory that is designed to hold a specific type of data, e.g.,
the LR area is designed to hold common data in a PC Link System.

data link Allows for the connection of up to 32 PCs in a Net Link System where each is
contributing information to a common memory area. Data links may be estab-
lished in the LR and/or DM memory areas.

debugging The process of checking for errors in a program.

default condition The original condition of a function or system. For example, the Ladder Support
Software’s (LSS) installation utility will place the LSS in the C:\LSS directory, but
this default condition can be changed so that it places the LSS in a different
directory.

distributed control An automation concept in which control of each portion of an automated system
is located near the devices actually being controlled, i.e., control is decentralized
and “distributed” over the system. Distributed control is a concept basic to PC
Systems.

EEPROM [E(lectrically) E(rasable) P(rogrammable) R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of

ROM in which stored data can be erased and reprogrammed. This is accom-
plished using a special control lead connected to the EEPROM chip and can be
done without having to remove the EEPROM chip from the device in which it is
mounted.

electrical noise Electric ‘static’ that can disturb electronic communications. The ‘snow’ that can
appear on a TV screen is an example of the effects of electrical noise.

EPROM [E(rasable) P(rogrammable) R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of ROM in which

stored data can be erased, by ultraviolet light or other means, and repro-
grammed.

Expansion I/O Unit An I/O Unit for a Package-type PC that provides more I/O points to the PC.

factory computer A general-purpose computer, usually quite similar to a business computer, that
is used in automated factory control.

flag A bit that is turned ON and OFF automatically by the system in order to provide
status information.

High-speed Counter A Special I/O Unit. A High Speed Counter Unit counts independently of the PC’s
cycle time. This allows counting of very short, fast signals.

host computer A computer that is used to transfer data to or receive data from a PC in a Host
Link system. The host computer is used for data management and overall sys-
tem control. Host computers are generally small personal or business comput-
ers.

IBM PC/AT or compatible A computer that has similar architecture to, and is logically compatible with an
IBM PC/XT computer; and that can run software designed for that computer.

instruction line A succession of instructions which begins with a load instruction at the left bus
bar and ends at a right bus bar.

interface An interface is the conceptual boundary between systems or devices and usual-
ly involves changes in the way the communicated data is represented. Interface
devices such as NSBs perform operations such as changing the coding, format,
or speed of data.

238
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Glossary

I/O devices The devices which are connected to the terminals on I/O Units, Special I/O Units,
or Intelligent I/O Units. I/O devices may be part of the Control System if they
function to help control other devices, or they may be part of the controlled sys-
tem if they interact directly with it.

I/O point The place at which an input signal enters the PC System or an output signal
leaves the PC System. In physical terms, an I/O point corresponds to terminals
or connector pins on a Unit; in terms of programming, an I/O point corresponds
to an I/O bit in the IR area.

I/O table Diagram written to the IR memory area listing the type of I/O units controlled by a
PC. It must be cleared before programming or when I/O units are changed.
Tables can be read, verified, or transferred to a EPROM.

I/O Unit The most basic type of Unit mounted to a Backplane. I/O Units include Input
Units and Output Units, each of which is available in a range of specifications.
I/O Units do not include Special I/O Units, Link Units, etc.

Limit Switch A switch that detects when an object has reached the limit of its movement by
actually making contact with the object. Limit Switches are fitted to electric ele-
vators, traveling cranes, etc. to indicate when a certain part of the equipment has
traveled to the specified limit.

Link Unit Any of the Units used to connect a PC to a Link System. These are Remote I/O
Units, I/O Link Units, PC Link Units, Host Link Units, and Net Link Units.

operating mode The Display Terminal Unit can operate in five different modes: Page Read, Ter-
minal. Dynamic Scan, Read/Write, and Self-Diagnosis.

page One complete Display Terminal Unit screen. Two hundred screens can be
stored on one RAM card.

parallel interface The parallel interface uses the RS-232 connector, but is not serial communica-
tion. When parallel mode is selected as the communication mode, up to 16 Dis-
play Terminal Units can be connected to a PC in parallel.

PC An acronym for Programmable Controller.

PCB An acronym for printed circuit board.

PC Link Unit A Unit used to connect two or more PCs together so that they can exchange data
through their LR areas.

Photoelectric Switch A switch that uses light to detect the presence of an object.

Power Supply A Unit that mounts to a Backplane in a Rack PC. It provides power at the voltage
required by the other Units on the Rack.

printed circuit board A board onto which electrical circuits are printed for mounting into a computer or
electrical device.

Programmable Controller A small, computer-like device that can control peripheral equipment, such as an
electric door or quality control devices, based on programming and peripheral
input devices. Any process that can be controlled using electrical signals can be
controlled by a PC. PCs can be used independently or networked together into a
system to control more complex operations.

programming device A peripheral device used to write programs and to input a program to a PC or to
alter or monitor a program already stored in the PC. There are dedicated pro-

239
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Glossary

gramming devices, such as Programming Consoles, and there are non-dedi-

cated programming devices, such as a host computer.
PROM [P(rogrammable) R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of ROM into which the pro-
gram or data may be written after manufacture, by a customer, but which is fixed
from that time on.
PROM Writer A PROM Writer is a device used to write data to ROM, PROM, and EPROM stor-
age chips.
Proximity Switch A switch that uses magnetic induction to measure the distance of a metallic ob-
ject from the front of the switch.
Rack PC A PC that is composed of Units mounted to one or more Racks. This configura-
tion is the most flexible, and most large PCs are Rack PCs. A Rack PC is the
opposite of a Package-type PC, which has all of the basic I/O, storage, and con-
trol functions built into a single package.
RAM [R(andom) A(ccess) M(emory)] RAM will not retain data when power is discon-
nected. Therefore data should not be stored in RAM.
register/registered Storing text and graphics in the RAM/ROM card from a personal computer or the
ASCII Unit. Graphics that have been written to the RAM/ROM card are referred
to as registered messages.
Remote I/O Unit A Unit that extends the distance an Expansion I/O Unit can be from the CPU Unit.
ROM [R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of digital storage that cannot be written to. A
ROM chip is manufactured with its program or data already stored in it, and it can
never be changed. However, the program or data can be read as many times as
desired.
switching capacity The voltage/current that relay can switch ON and OFF.
stepping motor An output device that rotates according to signals from the Control System. The
rotation is very precise and occurs in pre-defined “steps.”
switch An input device that sends either an ON or OFF signal to the Control System. A
switch can be operated either by a person or by the movement of a piece of
equipment or material.
system configuration The arrangement in which Units in a System are connected. This term refers to
the conceptual arrangement and wiring together of all the devices needed to
comprise the System. In OMRON terminology, system configuration is used to
describe the arrangement and connection of the Units comprising a Control Sys-
tem that includes one or more PCs.
Unit In OMRON PC terminology, the word Unit is capitalized to indicate any product
sold for a PC System. though most of the names of these products end with the
word Unit, not all do, e.g., a Remote Terminal is referred to in a collective sense
as a Unit. Context generally makes any limitations of this word clear.
watchdog timer A special timer inside the CPU Unit that monitors the PC’s cycle time. The watch-
dog timer sets a flag if the cycle time becomes longer than a certain specified
value. This is useful if the correct operation of your System depends on a certain
maximum cycle time.
word In digital circuits, a group of bits. Usually a word consists of four, eight, or sixteen
bits. In C-series PCs, a word consists of sixteen bits. Words can be used to store
data, or they can be used for I/O.
work bits Bits in the IR area that are not being used for input or output. These bits can be
used in the program in any way desired.

240
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Index

A errors
CPU Rack, 86
Expansion I/O Rack, 86
ambient temperature, 51 Input Unit, 87
Analog Timer Unit Output Unit, 88
dimensions, 227
specifications, 200
F
applications, precautions, xviii
factory computer, 2
assembly, I/O Units, 58

G
B
grounding
B7A Interface Unit, dimensions, 226 ground terminal, 69
line ground terminal, 69
B7A Interface Units wire, 69
dimensions, 226
Group-2 Units, 204 Group-2 High-density I/O Units, 27
C-shape, 28
B7A Link Terminals, 205 D-shape, 29
Backplane Insulation Plate, 55 dimensions, 227

H
battery, Memory Unit, replacement, 93

C High-density I/O Units, 30

dimensions, 227
contact protection circuit, 138 limitations, 184, 197
specifications, 171
control components, 2
humidity, 50
Control System, 2
cooling, fan, 50 I
CPU Unit
components, 14 I/O Unit Cover, 72
Memory Cassettes, 17 I/O Units
Group-2 High-density I/O Units, 27
current consumption, 215, 219
High-density I/O Units, 30
5-V supply, 217, 218
Standard I/O Units, 25
CX-Programmer, 32 inductive load surge suppressor, 77
cycle, 6 input devices, 4
cycle time, 6 installation
environment
ambient conditions, 50
D cooling, 50
cooling fan, 51
dimensions, 213, 221, 222, 223 Rack clearance, 50
precautions, xviii
duct work
I/O wiring, 78 interlock circuit, 78
power cables, 78 Interrupt Input Unit, dimensions, 226

E L
EC Directives, precautions, xx leakage current
input, 73
electrical noise, 76 output, 75
electrostatic charge, 50 limit switch, 4

241
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Index

M S
Memory Cassette, 17 safety precautions. See precautions
installing, 61 servomotor drivers, 3
models, C200HS, 97 servomotors, 3, 5

mounting short-circuit protection, 75

conditions, 33 short-circuit protection, 148
Racks, conduit, 51
solenoid, 5
mounting requirements, 60 Special I/O Units, 33
DIN track mounting, 55
DIN track mounting bracket, 56 specifications
procedure, 56 C200H-ID501, 171
C200H-IA121, 124
C200H-IA122, 125

O C200H-IA122V, 125
C200H-IA221, 126
C200H-IA222, 127
one-to-one link, wiring, 120 C200H-IA222V, 127
C200H-ID211, 122, 155
operating environment, precautions, xvii
C200H-ID212, 123
output devices, 4 C200H-ID215, 173
C200H-ID216, 157
C200H-ID217, 158
P C200H-ID218, 160
C200H-ID219, 161
C200H-IM211, 128
PC C200H-IM212, 129
block diagram, 5 C200H-MD115 (dynamic), 190
flowchart, 7 C200H-MD115 (static), 188
operation, 5 C200H-MD215 (dynamic), 194
role of, 4 C200H-MD215 (static), 192
PCs, cooling, 50 C200H-MD501 (dynamic), 186
C200H-MD501 (static), 184
photoelectric switch, 4 C200H-OA122-E, 149
C200H-OA221, 151
power consumption, 215, 219
C200H-OA222V, 152
power interruptions, Programmable Controller, 79 C200H-OA223, 153
C200H-OA224, 154
precautions C200H-OC221, 130
applications, xviii C200H-OC222, 131
general, xv, xvi C200H-OC222N, 135
operating environment, xvii C200H-OC222V, 135
safety, xvi C200H-OC223, 133
process control computer, 2 C200H-OC224, 134
C200H-OC224N, 137
Programming Console C200H-OC224V, 137
checking initial operation, 84 C200H-OC225, 132
Hand-held, 3 C200H-OC226, 136
C200H-OC226N, 136
proximity switch, 4 C200H-OD211, 141
C200H-OD212, 142

R
C200H-OD213, 143
C200H-OD214, 144
C200H-OD215 (dynamic), 181
relay, printed circuit board, 92 C200H-OD215 (static), 179
C200H-OD216, 146
relays, Output Unit, replacement, 90 C200H-OD217, 147
RS-232C, port specifications, 119 C200H-OD218, 162
C200H-OD219, 166
RS-232C port C200H-OD21A, 148
connecting devices, one-to-one link, 120 C200H-OD21B, 170
specifications, 119, 120 C200H-OD411, 140
wiring example, 119 C200H-OD501 (dynamic), 177

242
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Index

C200H-OD501 (static), 175 SYSMAC LINK, 40

C200HS-INT01, 198
SYSMAC NET Link, 41
C200H-TM001, 200
Contact Output Unit, life expectancy, 138 system configuration, 3
Group-2 B7A Interface Units, 204
High-density I/O Units, 171
Standard I/O Units, 122 T
Standard I/O Units, 25 terminal block, 71
A-shape, 26
B-shape, 26 transistor output, residual voltage, 75
dimensions, 224
E-shape, 26
specifications, 122 W
static electricity, preventing, 50 wiring
AC Input Units, 73
stepping motor, 5
DC Input Units, 72
surge current, output, 76 power supply, 63

243
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Revision History

A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.

Cat. No. W302-E1-12

Revision code

The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.

Revision code Date Revised content

1 June 1996 Original production
2 March 1997 Relay Output Units changed to Contact Output Units
throughout the manual.
Pages 55, 56: Crimp terminals information corrected.
EC Directives information added.
Page 11: 64-point Units column added to the second Page 57: Tightening torque information added.
table in CPU Units. Page 59: Contact output circuit corrected.
Pages 20, 22, 82, 98, 111, 177: C200H-OC222V, Pages 76 to 78: Output Unit Relay and Output Units
C200H-OC224V, and C200H-OC226 Contact Output added to the procedure.
Units added. Page 85: Relay added to Optional Products.
Page 21: Note on C200H-OC226 dimensions added. Page 93: Output capacity corrected in the table.
Page 23: The settings corrected for I/O Number Set- Page 96: Connector models corrected.
ting Switch at the bottom of page.
Page 112: New Contact Output Units reflected.
Page 42: Ambient Conditions precautions replaced.
Pages 116, 117, 122: Circuit configurations corrected
Page 43: Note on tightening torque added. for C200H-OD212, C200H-OD213, and
Page 50: Note 3 corrected. C200H-OD21A.
Pages 54, 56: Crimp terminals information corrected. Page 182: C200H-OC226 dimensions added.

3 August 1997 Added the ZE-version C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit to

Section 2, Appendix A, and Appendix B.
corrected and added to.
Page 70: Note on cycling the power supply added to
Pages 17, 18, 54, 58: AC input terminal information the procedure.

4 October 1997 Page 11, 19. 57, 85, 185: Added C200HW-PA204R. Page 56, 101/102: Added information on 24-VDC out-
Page 16: “KB” corrected to “K words” in the table. put.
Page 18: Addition to first paragraph in 2-2-4 Power Page 92: Added CompoBus/S and CompoBus/D Mas-
Supply Units. Information on AC input terminals in the ter Units.
diagram corrected.
Page 19: Added sentence on power consumption Page 101: Separated output capacities and added
restrictions and tables on CPU Units and Backplanes specifications for RUN output. Enclosure rating cor-
for C200HW-PA204R. rected.
Page 41, 86, 188: Added Controller Link Unit and PC
Page 123: Graphs corrected.
Card Unit.
Page 56: Corrections and additions made to the note Page 196: Analog Timer Unit and Group-2 High-den-
in the diagram. sity I/O Units dimensions corrected.

5 June 2000 Page xii to xiv: Major changes made to safety

information.
Page 67: Precautionary information added.
Page 71: One sentence added to information on
Pages 11, 12, 13, 19, 20, 48, 49, 59, 61, 89, 90, 91, power interruptions.
103, 189, 196, 201: Information related to Power Sup- Page 78: Information added to table.
ply Units and/or Backplanes added/changed. Page 81: Information on Output Units added.
Page 15: Information on DIP switch pin 5 changed. Page 95: Information on Voice Unit added.
Pages 22, 92: Information on Triac Output Units add- Pages 105, 137: Changes made in several places.
ed/changed. Page 106: Information on RUN output added.
Pages 24, 26, 93, 191: Information related to Group-2 Page 107: Changes made to bit addresses.
High-density I/O Units added. Page 147: Information on DC Input Units added.
Pages 30, 94, 192: Information on Position Control Pages 148, 150, 159, 161, 169, 171: Circuit configu-
Units and/or Motion Control Units added. ration graphics and information on manufacturing
Page 40: Information on the number of mountable numbers added.
Master I/O Units added. Pages 149, 151, 162, 170, 171: Notes added.
Page 47: Minor change to graphic. Page 151: Information on Transistor Output Units
Page 62: Power consumption value in first line added.
changed from 50 to 40. Page 180: Information on B7A Interface Units added.

6 January 2001 Page 12: Note added after table.

07 November 2001 Page xiv: Memory Units changed to Memory Cas-

settes and Power Supply Units added to the precau-
connectors.
Page 77: Power interruption duration changed.
tion item for turning OFF the power supply. Page 146: Note changed to clarify indicator condi-
Page 29: I/O number setting changed for two 40-pin tions.

08 February 2003 “CompoBus/D” was globally changed to “DeviceNet.”

Page 21: “NC” added to top left illustration.
Pages 25, 27, 98, 119, and 207: “N” added to model numbers and/or model numbers
added.
Page 31: Section 2-3-2 replaced with section on CX-Programmer.
Pages 68, 88, and 91: Note added.
Pages 77 and 86: Information added on Antinoise Insulating Attachment.
Pages 133 to 135: Model numbers added and relay specifications changed. (Index
entries also added for new model numbers.)

245
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Revision History

Revision code Date Revised content

09 June 2003 The following corrections and changes were made.
Page 113: Voltage at bottom right of table changed to “1,000.”
Page 135: Note added.
Pages 140, 160, 161, 164, 171, 173, 174, 176, 178, 179, 181, 182, 184, and
186: Circuit configurations added for new versions of Units.
Page 167: “At 24 VDC...” removed.
10 July 2004 The following corrections and changes were made.
Pages xv and xvi: Conformance to EC Directives replaced.
Pages 12, 28, and 204 : Notes added.
Page 21: Terminal labels added.
Page 23: Manufacturing number diagram changed.
Page 27: Model number corrected at bottom of page.
Pages 120 and 126: Voltages for ON response time and OFF response time
changed.
Page 72: Model number added at bottom of page.
Pages 95 and 213: Currents for Power Supply Units changed in four locations.
Page 17 and 18: Pages replaced.
Page 146: Maximum output current added.
Page 165: Manufacturing number corrected above bottom graphic.
Page 199: Information added at bottom of page.
Page 215: Current corrected for C200H-OC222N.
11 January 2005 Information on the Power Supply Unit with Replacement Notification was added.
12 September 2005 The following changes and corrections were made.
Pages 11, 13, 20, 98, 115, 116, 117, and 215: Information on C200HW-
PD-025 Power Supply Units added to table.
Pages 20, 118, and 235: Note added.
Pages 21, 68, and 223: Information on C200HW-PD-025 Power Supply Units
added to graphic.
Pages 22, 69, and 215: Information on C200HW-PD-025 Power Supply Units
added.
Pages 116 and 117: Note references corrected.

246
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 OMRON Corporation
Control Devices Division H.Q.
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81)75-344-7109/Fax: (81)75-344-7149
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173
U.S.A.
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
83 Clemenceau Avenue,
#11-01, UE Square,
Singapore 239920
Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120 China
Tel: (86)21-5037-2222/Fax: (86)21-5037-2200

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
 Authorized Distributor:

Cat. No. W302-E1-12 Note: Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan

This manual is printed on 100% recycled paper.

Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Artisan Technology Group is an independent supplier of quality pre-owned equipment

Gold-standard solutions We buy equipment Learn more!

Extend the life of your critical industrial, Planning to upgrade your current Visit us at artisantg.com for more info
commercial, and military systems with our equipment? Have surplus equipment taking on price quotes, drivers, technical
superior service and support. up shelf space? We'll give it a new home. specifications, manuals, and documentation.

Artisan Scientific Corporation dba Artisan Technology Group is not an affiliate, representative, or authorized distributor for any manufacturer listed herein.

We're here to make your life easier. How can we help you today?
(217) 352-9330 I sales@artisantg.com I artisantg .com